Evolution DX2 User Manual - Rain Master Control Systems

Evolution DX2 User Manual - Rain Master Control Systems
12/11/06
5:07 PM
Page 1
3910-B Royal Avenue
Simi Valley, California 93063
Telephone: (805) 527-4498 Fax: (805) 527-2813
www.rainmaster.com
Evolution
n DX2
DX2-Cover-2B.final
Evolution DX2
Evolution
DX 2
USER
UserMANUAL
Manual
SUN
We’re
or RAIN,
in Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Table Of Contents
CHAPTER 1......................................................................................... 1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................... 1
ABOUT THIS MANUAL ....................................................................... 1
FEATURES AND CAPABILITIES................................................... 4
EVOLUTION DX2 FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS............ 4
HARDWARE FEATURES ...................................................................... 4
SCHEDULING CAPABILITIES ............................................................... 5
PROGRAM SETUP OPTIONS ................................................................ 6
MAINTENANCE AND ALARM DIAGNOSTIC CAPABILITIES .................. 6
MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES .............................................................. 8
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 9
CHAPTER 2......................................................................................... 9
SYSTEM BASICS ............................................................................... 9
EVOLUTION DX2 CONTROLLER FRONT PANEL ................................. 9
EVOLUTION DX2 CONTROLLER FRONT PANEL ............................... 10
BASE SCREEN .................................................................................. 12
MAIN MENU .................................................................................... 14
USING THE CONTROLLER KEYS ....................................................... 15
"Beep" Responses....................................................................... 17
System Configuration................................................................. 17
Keyboard Main Panel ................................................................ 17
Main Power Switch Box ............................................................. 18
Master Valve/Pump/Power Board ............................................. 18
Station Output Board ................................................................. 18
Communication Board (optional) .............................................. 19
Sensor Terminal Board (optional) ............................................. 19
DX2 Pedestal Controller Assembly Layout................................ 20
CHAPTER 3....................................................................................... 23
GETTING STARTED....................................................................... 23
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE ........................................................... 23
MASTER VALVE/PUMP PROGRAM DEFAULT OPTIONS ..................... 25
TO CREATE A PROGRAM, THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS MUST BE SET:
........................................................................................................ 28
CHAPTER 4....................................................................................... 35
Table of Contents
i
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
SETUP ................................................................................................35
SYSTEM DEFAULTS ..........................................................................35
SYSTEM DEFAULTS ..........................................................................36
PROGRAM ........................................................................................41
Program Setup Procedure..........................................................42
ISC (INDIVIDUAL STATION CONTROL).............................................50
Station Number Procedure .........................................................51
STATIONS .........................................................................................52
STATIONS SETUP ..............................................................................53
Limits/Type Procedure ...............................................................55
Main Flow Procedure ................................................................61
Flow Max Main Line Limits .......................................................61
Procedure ...................................................................................62
Auto Limits Procedure................................................................63
SETUP CONTROLLER ........................................................................67
Flow Options Procedure ............................................................68
Omit By Date Procedure ............................................................72
User Options Procedure.............................................................73
Configuration Procedure ...........................................................79
SENSORS ..........................................................................................83
Moisture Procedure....................................................................83
Flow Procedure..........................................................................84
CHAPTER 5.......................................................................................89
PROGRAM ENTRY .........................................................................89
EXAMPLE OF PROGRAM EXECUTION ................................................89
EXAMPLE OF PROGRAM EXECUTION ................................................90
MODIFY PROGRAM ..........................................................................92
Overview ....................................................................................92
PROGRAM START TIME PROCEDURE ................................................93
Overview ....................................................................................93
Procedure ...................................................................................93
WATERING DAY OPTIONS ................................................................95
Water Days Procedure (14 Day Cycle)......................................95
Overview ....................................................................................95
Procedure ...................................................................................96
WATER DAYS PROCEDURE (SKIP BY DAY)......................................98
Overview ....................................................................................98
Procedure ...................................................................................98
WATER DAYS PROCEDURE (31 DAY CYCLE) ................................. 100
Overview .................................................................................. 100
Procedure ................................................................................. 100
ii
Table of Contents
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
STATIONS ...................................................................................... 102
Overview .................................................................................. 102
Procedure................................................................................. 102
STATION RUN TIME OPTION .......................................................... 103
Programming Individual Stations with Different Run Times ... 103
Procedure................................................................................. 103
QUICK STATION PROGRAMMING OPTION ...................................... 105
Programming Station Groups with Identical Run Time........... 105
Procedure................................................................................. 105
PERCENT ........................................................................................ 107
Overview .................................................................................. 107
Procedure................................................................................. 107
SEND (APPLIES TO CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEMS ONLY) .............. 109
Overview .................................................................................. 109
Procedure................................................................................. 109
NEW PROGRAM ............................................................................. 111
Overview .................................................................................. 111
New Program Procedure ......................................................... 112
REVIEW PROGRAM ........................................................................ 113
Review Program Procedure..................................................... 114
CLEAR PROGRAM .......................................................................... 116
Clear Program Procedure ....................................................... 116
PROGRAM ON/OFF......................................................................... 117
PROGRAM ON/OFF PROCEDURE .................................................... 118
Stopping a program ................................................................. 118
Starting a Program .................................................................. 119
CHAPTER 6..................................................................................... 120
INDIVIDUAL STATION CONTROL........................................... 120
ISC ................................................................................................ 122
CHAPTER 7..................................................................................... 123
SYSTEM STATUS .......................................................................... 123
COMM STATUS .............................................................................. 124
MEASUREMENTS............................................................................ 125
Measurements Procedure......................................................... 126
WATER TOTAL .............................................................................. 129
Water Total Procedure............................................................. 129
REVIEW ALL .................................................................................. 131
Procedure................................................................................. 131
CHAPTER 8..................................................................................... 133
Table of Contents
iii
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
MANUAL SYSTEM CONTROL ................................................... 133
TEST .............................................................................................. 134
Procedure ................................................................................. 134
MULTI-STATION ............................................................................ 137
Procedure ................................................................................. 137
MULTI-STATION DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................... 142
Diagnostic Procedure............................................................... 142
PRESS THE QUIT KEY TO RETURN TO THE BASE MENU................... 145
STATION ........................................................................................ 145
Procedure ................................................................................. 145
RAIN OFF ....................................................................................... 149
Procedure ................................................................................. 149
CHAPTER 9..................................................................................... 153
CENTRAL CONTROL................................................................... 153
CONTROLLER AS SUBMASTER ........................................................ 154
TRANSFERRING PROGRAMS BETWEEN THE CENTRAL CONTROL
COMPUTER AND SUBMASTER/SATELLITE CONTROLLERS .............. 155
Upload Procedure .................................................................... 155
COMMUNICATIONS AND PROBLEM REPORTING ............................. 157
Submaster ................................................................................. 157
Satellite..................................................................................... 157
Diagnostics............................................................................... 158
Controller Logs ........................................................................ 158
Weather Center Sensors ........................................................... 159
CHAPTER 10................................................................................... 161
FIELD MAINTENANCE ACTIVITY AND
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 161
FLOW MONITORING ........................................................................ 161
BROKEN FIELD WIRING, SHORT CIRCUITS, AND FAULTY VALVE
SOLENOIDS:.................................................................................... 161
AC POWER INPUT PROBLEMS:........................................................ 161
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING ISSUES: ............................................... 161
WARNING REPORT (ALARMS)........................................................ 163
VIEWING THE WARNING LIST ........................................................ 164
WARNING DISPLAY LIST ................................................................ 165
Standard Warnings................................................................... 165
Flow Max Warnings ................................................................. 166
STANDARD FLOW WARNINGS ........................................................ 167
001 - Station Flow Too Low ..................................................... 167
iv
Table of Contents
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
002 - Station Flow Too High.................................................... 169
003 - Monthly Water Limit Violation ....................................... 171
004 - Station Electrical Current Too High............................... 173
005 - Station Electrical Current Too Low................................ 175
006 - Controller Main Line Break Occurred ........................... 177
007 - Hourly Rain Limit Was Exceeded ................................... 178
008 - Hardwire Communications Restored (On Line) ............. 179
009 - Off Line ........................................................................... 180
010 - Hardwire Communication Failure ................................. 182
011 - Wind Lower Limit Satisfied............................................. 184
012 - Wind Upper Limit Exceeded ........................................... 185
013 - Power Failure................................................................. 186
014 - Power Restoration .......................................................... 187
015 - Program Upload Request ............................................... 188
016 - Unscheduled Flow .......................................................... 189
017 - Daily Rain Limit Reached............................................... 190
018 - Short Circuit ................................................................... 191
FLOW MAX WARNINGS ................................................................. 192
019 - Flow Max - Flow Lower Limit Violation ........................ 192
020 - Flow Max - Flow Upper Limit Violation ........................ 194
021 - FM - Multiple Flow Sensor 1 Assignment ...................... 195
022 - FM - Multiple Flow Sensor 2 Assignment ...................... 196
023 - FM - Multiple Pump Assignment .................................... 197
024 - FM - Multiple Master Valve ........................................... 199
025 - FM - Multiple Master Valve 2 Assignment ..................... 200
026 - FM - Multiple Normally Open Master Valves ................ 202
027 - Flow Max - Station Advance........................................... 204
028 - Flow Max - Stop Water................................................... 205
029 - Auto Limits Aborted ........................................................ 206
030 - FM - Communications Failure ....................................... 207
031- FM - Communications Restored ...................................... 209
032 - Flow Max - Main Flow ................................................... 209
032 - Flow Max - Main Flow ................................................... 210
TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................... 211
Directory of Flow Chart Diagnostic Problems........................ 212
Automatic Program Does Not Start ......................................... 213
Flow Sensor Reading Always Zero .......................................... 215
A Station/Valve Does Not Water .............................................. 218
A Station/Valve Does Not Water .............................................. 218
Display is Blank ....................................................................... 218
Display is Blank ....................................................................... 219
Display is Blank ....................................................................... 220
Display is Blank ....................................................................... 221
Table of Contents
v
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Controller Emits a Constant Tone............................................ 223
Program Starts - But Does Not Water...................................... 224
Monthly Flow Violation Occurred but Program Still Operates
.................................................................................................. 226
Monthly Flow Violation Occurred but Program Still Operates
.................................................................................................. 227
Multiple Stations Do Not Water ............................................... 228
CONTROLLER STATION OUTPUT BOARD ........................................ 229
CONTROL DEVICES (RAIN SENSORS, FREEZE SENSORS, ETC.) ....... 231
APPENDIX A................................................................................... 232
FLOW METERS ............................................................................. 232
FLOW METER OPERATION OVERVIEW ........................................... 233
FLOW READING ACCURACY .......................................................... 234
FLOW METER OFFSET AND K VALUES ........................................... 234
RAIN MASTER FLOW SENSORS.............................................. 235
SELECTION CHART................................................................... 235
DATA INDUSTRIAL TEE MOUNTED SENSORS ................................. 236
FLOW LIMIT CHECKING ................................................................. 236
STATION UPPER LIMIT ................................................................... 236
STATION LOWER LIMIT .................................................................. 237
MAIN FLOW LIMITS ....................................................................... 237
TOTAL MONTHLY FLOW LIMIT ...................................................... 238
UNSCHEDULED FLOW LIMIT .......................................................... 238
ENABLING AND DISABLING FLOW LIMIT CHECKING...................... 239
DELAYING FLOW RATE LIMIT CHECKING ...................................... 239
LIMIT CHECKING WITH TWO FLOW METERS .................................. 241
FLOW METER READING ................................................................. 241
Procedure ................................................................................. 241
READING MONTHLY WATER TOTALS ............................................ 243
Procedure ................................................................................. 243
WHEN A FLOW LIMIT VIOLATION IS DETECTED............................. 244
FLOW LIMIT VIOLATION EXAMPLES .............................................. 245
Overflow in Controller/Main Line Break ................................. 245
STATION OVERFLOW ..................................................................... 246
STATION UNDER FLOW .................................................................. 246
MONTHLY WATER LIMIT EXCEEDED ............................................. 246
MULTIPLE STATIONS WITH NON-OVERLAP PROTECTION ............... 247
APPENDIX B ................................................................................... 254
CURRENT MONITOR................................................................... 254
CURRENT MONITOR SETUP ............................................................ 254
vi
Table of Contents
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
CURRENT LIMIT DETECTION.......................................................... 255
AUTO LIMITS PROCEDURE ............................................................. 256
ENABLING AND DISABLING CURRENT CHECKING ......................... 258
Procedure................................................................................. 258
STATION CURRENT LIMIT SETUP ................................................... 259
Current Limit Setup Procedure:............................................... 260
EXAMPLE CURRENT LIMIT VIOLATIONS ........................................ 262
Station Consumes Too Much Current ...................................... 262
STATION CONSUMES TOO LITTLE CURRENT.................................. 262
MULTIPLE STATIONS WITH NON-OVERLAP PROTECTION .............. 262
MAXIMUM CONTROLLER CURRENT ............................................... 263
APPENDIX C................................................................................... 265
POWER FAILURE/RECOVERY ................................................. 265
PROBLEM REPORTING .................................................................... 265
CANCELING AND CONTINUING WATERING PROGRAMS ................. 266
APPENDIX D................................................................................... 269
ACCESS CODES............................................................................. 269
ENTERING AN ACCESS CODE ......................................................... 269
Procedure: ............................................................................... 269
USING ACCESS CODES ................................................................... 272
Gain Access Procedure:........................................................... 273
APPENDIX E................................................................................... 275
FLOW MAX .................................................................................... 275
OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... 276
SUBMASTER ................................................................................... 277
DEVICES ........................................................................................ 277
FLOW SENSORS.............................................................................. 278
FLOW CHECK DELAY..................................................................... 279
MAIN LINE LIMITS ......................................................................... 279
FLOW MAX LIMITATIONS .............................................................. 279
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION ........................................................... 280
FLOW MAX SETUP PROCEDURE ..................................................... 285
Overview .................................................................................. 285
Submaster: ..................................................................................... 285
Satellite: ......................................................................................... 285
SUBMASTER SETUP PROCEDURE .................................................... 286
FLOW MAX MAIN LINE FLOW LIMITS PROCEDURE ....................... 292
MAIN FLOW PROCEDURE ............................................................... 292
Table of Contents
vii
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
SATELLITE CONTROLLERS ............................................................. 294
Procedure ................................................................................. 294
FLOW MAX WORKSHEET ............................................................... 301
FLOW MAX DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS .................................................... 304
Real Time Flow Monitor .......................................................... 304
Procedure ................................................................................. 304
PRESS THE QUIT KEY TO RETURN TO THE BASE MENU................... 306
REVIEW FLOW MAX PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION .......................... 306
Review All Procedure............................................................... 306
FLOW MAX WARNINGS AND EXCEPTION CONDITIONS .................. 309
FLOW MAX LOWER LIMIT VIOLATION ........................................... 309
FLOW MAX UPPER LIMIT VIOLATION ............................................ 310
FLOW MAX COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE ....................................... 311
FLOW MAX MAIN FLOW ................................................................ 312
FLOW MAX UNSCHEDULED FLOW ................................................. 312
APPENDIX F ................................................................................... 314
TROUBLESHOOTING BASICS................................................... 314
ANALOG MULTIMETERS ................................................................ 315
VOLTAGE SCALE ............................................................................ 316
DIGITAL MULTIMETERS ................................................................. 317
TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................... 318
CABLE CHECKOUT PROCEDURE ..................................................... 318
POLARITY CHECKOUT PROCEDURE................................................ 321
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT .................................................................. 321
Procedure ................................................................................. 321
ALTERNATE POLARITY CHECKOUT PROCEDURE............................ 324
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT .................................................................. 324
Procedure ................................................................................. 324
GLOSSARY ..................................................................................... 328
INDEX .............................................................................................. 338
RAIN MASTER LIMITED WARRANTY.................................... 355
Table of Figures
FIGURE 1: EVOLUTION DX2 PEDESTAL ENCLOSURE..........2
FIGURE 2: EVOLUTION DX2 CONTROLLER FACE PANEL 10
FIGURE 3: BASE SCREEN .............................................................12
FIGURE 4: MAIN MENU ................................................................14
viii
Table of Contents
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FIGURE 5: PEDESTAL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY LAYOUT
............................................................................................................. 20
FIGURE 6: AC POWER SUPPLY WIRING DIAGRAM ............ 21
FIGURE 7: MASTER VALVE AND STATION CONNECTION 22
FIGURE 8: LANGUAGE SELECTION ......................................... 23
FIGURE 9: YEAR ENTRY .............................................................. 24
FIGURE 10: MONTH ENTRY........................................................ 24
FIGURE 11: DAY OF THE MONTH ENTRY .............................. 24
FIGURE 12: DAY OF THE WEEK ENTRY.................................. 25
FIGURE 13: TIME OF DAY ENTRY............................................. 25
FIGURE 14: MASTER VALVE OPTIONS.................................... 26
FIGURE 15: PUMP OPTIONS........................................................ 26
FIGURE 16: BASE SCREEN DISPLAY ........................................ 26
FIGURE 17: PROGRAM ENTRY .................................................. 42
FIGURE 18: CYCLE MODE ........................................................... 43
FIGURE 19: OVERLAP PROTECTION ....................................... 43
FIGURE 20: IRRIGATION PROGRAM ....................................... 44
FIGURE 21: OMIT BY DATE OPTION ........................................ 45
FIGURE 22: STATION DELAY TIME DISPLAY........................ 45
FIGURE 23: TIME FORMAT ......................................................... 46
FIGURE 24: AT WATER LIMIT.................................................... 47
FIGURE 25: MASTER VALVE SELECTION .............................. 47
FIGURE 26: PUMP SELECTION................................................... 48
FIGURE 27: VALVE ON/OFF BETWEEN STATIONS .............. 48
FIGURE 28: VALVE DELAY TURN ON TIME........................... 49
FIGURE 29: ISC PROGRAM NUMBER ....................................... 51
FIGURE 30: STATION LIMITS OPTIONS .................................. 53
FIGURE 31: FLOW/CURRENT SELECTION ............................. 53
FIGURE 32: UPPER LIMIT CHECK ............................................ 54
FIGURE 33: LOWER LIMIT CHECK .......................................... 54
FIGURE 34: LIMITS/TYPE ............................................................ 56
FIGURE 35: LIMIT OPTIONS ....................................................... 57
FIGURE 36: MAX CURRENT LIMIT ........................................... 57
FIGURE 37: MIN CURRENT LIMIT ............................................ 58
FIGURE 38: MAX FLOW LIMIT................................................... 58
FIGURE 39: MIN FLOW LIMIT.................................................... 58
FIGURE 40: STATION TYPE......................................................... 59
FIGURE 41: MAIN FLOW LIMIT ENTRY .................................. 62
FIGURE 42: MAIN LIMIT OPTIONS ........................................... 62
FIGURE 43: MAIN FLOW MAXIMUM LIMIT........................... 62
FIGURE 44: AUTO LIMITS ........................................................... 63
FIGURE 45: AUTO LIMITS ........................................................... 64
FIGURE 46: AUTO LIMITS ........................................................... 65
Table of Contents
ix
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FIGURE 47: CONTROLLER OPTIONS .......................................68
FIGURE 48: LIMIT OPTIONS........................................................68
FIGURE 49: MONTHLY WATER LIMIT ....................................69
FIGURE 50: FLOW METER SELECTION...................................70
FIGURE 51: DELAY LIMIT TIME................................................71
FIGURE 52: UNSCHED FLOW LIMIT.........................................71
FIGURE 53: OMISSION DATES ....................................................72
FIGURE 54: MONTH ENTRY ........................................................72
FIGURE 55: DAY OF THE MONTH..............................................73
FIGURE 56: USER OPTIONS .........................................................73
FIGURE 57: TIME FORMAT .........................................................74
FIGURE 58: TIME ENTRY FORMAT ..........................................74
FIGURE 59: YEAR ENTRY FORMAT..........................................75
FIGURE 60: MONTH ENTRY FORMAT......................................75
FIGURE 61: DATE OF THE MONTH ENTRY ............................75
FIGURE 62: DATE FORMAT OPTIONS ......................................75
FIGURE 63: DATE FORMAT OPTIONS ......................................76
FIGURE 64: DAY OF WEEK ENTRY FORMAT.........................76
FIGURE 65: USER OPTIONS .........................................................76
FIGURE 66: ACCESS CODE ..........................................................77
FIGURE 67: ACCESS CODE ..........................................................78
FIGURE 68: ACCESS RESTRICTION ..........................................78
FIGURE 69: SELECT ACCESS LEVEL........................................79
FIGURE 70: SELECT ACCESS LEVEL........................................79
FIGURE 71: CONFIGURATION OPTIONS .................................80
FIGURE 72: SUBMASTER COMMUNICATION ........................81
FIGURE 73: SUBMASTER ADDRESS ..........................................81
FIGURE 74: SHARED DEVICES ...................................................82
FIGURE 75: SENSOR OPTIONS....................................................83
FIGURE 76: SENSORS SETUP.......................................................83
FIGURE 77: SENSOR OPTIONS....................................................84
FIGURE 78: FLOW METER SELECTION...................................84
FIGURE 79: K VALUE ENTRY......................................................85
FIGURE 80: OFFSET VALUE ENTRY .........................................85
FIGURE 81: PROGRAM 1...............................................................91
FIGURE 82: MODIFY PROGRAM ................................................92
FIGURE 83: START TIME ENTRY...............................................93
FIGURE 84: WATER DAYS OPTIONS.........................................96
FIGURE 85: WEEK 1 ENTRY ........................................................96
FIGURE 86: SKIP BY DAY ENTRY ..............................................98
FIGURE 87: START WATER DAY................................................99
FIGURE 88: 31 DAYS CYCLE ENTRY ....................................... 100
FIGURE 89: STATIONS ................................................................ 102
x
Table of Contents
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FIGURE 90: STATION RUN TIME OPTIONS .......................... 103
FIGURE 91: SELECT STATION NUMBER ............................... 104
FIGURE 92: STATION RUN TIME ENTRY .............................. 104
FIGURE 93: QUICK STATION NUMBER ENTRY .................. 105
FIGURE 94: QUICK STATION TOTAL RUNTIME................. 106
FIGURE 95: PERCENTAGE RUN TIME ................................... 107
FIGURE 96: MODIFY PROGRAM.............................................. 109
FIGURE 97: PROGRAM UPLOAD REQUEST.......................... 109
FIGURE 98: WATER DAY CYCLE OPTIONS.......................... 112
FIGURE 99: PROGRAM ENTRY ................................................ 114
FIGURE 100: WEEK 1 WATER DAYS ....................................... 114
FIGURE 101: PROGRAM CLEAR NUMBER............................ 116
FIGURE 102: ISC............................................................................ 122
FIGURE 103: SYSTEM STATUS OPTIONS............................... 123
FIGURE 104: COMM STATUS .................................................... 124
FIGURE 105: MEASUREMENTS OPTION................................ 126
FIGURE 106: FLOW METER MEASUREMENTS.................... 126
FIGURE 107: CURRENT METER MEASUREMENTS ............ 127
FIGURE 108: ET ............................................................................. 127
FIGURE 109: RAIN/WIND READINGS...................................... 128
FIGURE 110: WATER TOTALS .................................................. 129
FIGURE 111: PAST MONTH WATER TOTALS....................... 130
FIGURE 112: REVIEW WATER DAYS ...................................... 131
FIGURE 113: MANUAL MAIN MENU ....................................... 133
FIGURE 114: OPERATION TIME............................................... 134
FIGURE 115: PROGRAM TESTING........................................... 135
FIGURE 116: MULTI-STATION OPTIONS............................... 137
FIGURE 117: STATION ON SEQUENTIALLY ......................... 139
FIGURE 118: STATION RUN TIME ........................................... 140
FIGURE 119: START LATER TIME........................................... 141
FIGURE 120: WARNING, SHORT CIRCUIT ............................ 142
FIGURE 121: MULTI-STATION OPTIONS............................... 143
FIGURE 122: RUN TIME ENTRY ............................................... 143
FIGURE 123: STATION/DEVICE ENTRY ................................. 143
FIGURE 124: STATION/DEVICE ENTRY ................................. 144
FIGURE 125: STATION NUMBER ENTRY............................... 145
FIGURE 126: STATION OPTIONS.............................................. 146
FIGURE 127: RUN TIME ENTRY ............................................... 146
FIGURE 128: STATION RUN STATUS ...................................... 147
FIGURE 129: MANUAL OPERATIONS MENU ........................ 148
FIGURE 130: RAIN OFF ............................................................... 149
FIGURE 131: RAIN SHUTDOWN................................................ 150
FIGURE 132: NO WATER WINDOW TIME ............................. 151
Table of Contents
xi
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FIGURE 133: PROGRAMMABLE RAIN SHUTDOWN ........... 151
FIGURE 134: SATELLITE ADDRESS DISPLAY ...................... 154
FIGURE 135: MODIFY PROGRAM ............................................ 155
FIGURE 136: PROGRAM SEND .................................................. 156
FIGURE 137: WARNING REPORT ............................................. 157
FIGURE 138: PROBLEM OFF-LINE........................................... 157
FIGURE 139: PROBLEM ON-LINE............................................. 158
FIGURE 140: WEATHER CENTER CONNECTIONS.............. 160
FIGURE 141: BASE SCREEN ....................................................... 164
FIGURE 142: WARNING 001 -FLOW LOWER LIMIT............ 167
FIGURE 143: WARNING 002-FLOW UPPER LIMIT............... 169
FIGURE 144: WARNING 003-WATER LIMIT .......................... 171
FIGURE 145: WARNING 004-CURRENT UPPER LIMIT ....... 173
FIGURE 146: WARNING 005-CURRENT LOW LIMIT........... 175
FIGURE 147: WARNING 006-MAIN FLOW .............................. 177
FIGURE 148: WARNING 007-HOURLY RAIN LIMIT............. 178
FIGURE 149: WARNING 008-ON LINE...................................... 179
FIGURE 150: WARNING 009-OFF LINE.................................... 180
FIGURE 151: WARNING 010-HARDWIRE COMMUNICATION
FAILURE ......................................................................................... 182
FIGURE 152: WARNING 011-WIND LOWER LIMIT.............. 184
FIGURE 153: WARNING 012-WIND UPPER LIMIT................ 185
FIGURE 154: WARNING 013-POWER FAILURE .................... 186
FIGURE 155: WARNING 014-POWER ON ................................ 187
FIGURE 156: WARNING 015-UPLOAD REQUEST.................. 188
FIGURE 157: WARNING 016-UNSCHEDULED LIMIT........... 189
FIGURE 158: WARNING 017-DAILY RAIN LIMIT ................. 190
FIGURE 159: WARNING 018-SHORT CIRCUIT ...................... 191
FIGURE 160: WARNING 019-FM FLOW LOW LIMIT ........... 192
FIGURE 161: WARNING 020-FM FLOW UPPER LIMIT........ 194
FIGURE 162: WARNING 021-FM MULTIPLE FLOW METER 1
ASSIGN ............................................................................................ 195
FIGURE 163: WARNING 022-FM MULTIPLE FLOW METER 2
ASSIGN ............................................................................................ 196
FIGURE 164: WARNING 023-FM MULTIPLE PUMP ............. 197
FIGURE 165: WARNING 024-FM MULTIPLE MV1
ASSIGNMENT................................................................................. 199
FIGURE 166: WARNING 025-FM MULTIPLE MV2
ASSIGNMENT................................................................................. 200
FIGURE 167: WARNING 026 -FM MULTIPLE N.O.
ASSIGNMENT................................................................................. 202
FIGURE 168: WARNING 027-FM STATION ADVANCE ........ 204
FIGURE 169: WARNING 028 -FM STOP WATER.................... 205
xii
Table of Contents
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FIGURE 170: WARNING 029 -AUTO LIMITS .......................... 206
FIGURE 171: WARNING 030 -FM HARDWIRE COMM
FAILURE ......................................................................................... 207
FIGURE 172: WARNING 031 -FM COMMUNICATIONS
RESTORED ..................................................................................... 209
FIGURE 173: WARNING 032 -FM MAIN FLOW...................... 210
FIGURE 174: OUTPUT BOARD STATION CONNECTIONS . 229
FIGURE 175: MEASUREMENT OPTIONS................................ 241
FIGURE 176: FLOW METER READINGS................................. 242
FIGURE 177: STATUS OPTIONS ................................................ 243
FIGURE 178: WATER TOTAL .................................................... 243
FIGURE 179: WARNING, MAIN FLOW .................................... 245
FIGURE 180: WARNING, UNSCHED LIMIT............................ 245
FIGURE 181: WARNING, FLOW UP LIMIT............................. 246
FIGURE 182: WARNING, FLOW LOW LIMIT ........................ 246
FIGURE 183: WARNING, WATER LIMIT ................................ 246
FIGURE 184: FLOW SENSOR INSTALLATION...................... 253
FIGURE 185: AUTO LIMITS ....................................................... 256
FIGURE 186: AUTO LIMITS ....................................................... 257
FIGURE 187: AUTO LIMITS ....................................................... 258
FIGURE 188: CURRENT LIMIT OPTIONS............................... 259
FIGURE 189: UPPER LIMIT ENABLE OPTION ...................... 259
FIGURE 190: LIMIT OPTIONS ................................................... 260
FIGURE 191: CURRENT LIMIT ENTRY................................... 261
FIGURE 192: WARNING, UP LIMIT.......................................... 262
FIGURE 193: WARNING, LOW LIMIT ..................................... 262
FIGURE 194: SHORT CIRCUIT WARNING ............................. 263
FIGURE 195: FUSE DISPLAY MESSAGE ................................. 263
FIGURE 196: ACCESS CODE ...................................................... 269
FIGURE 197: ACCESS CODE OPTIONS ................................... 270
FIGURE 198: ACCESS RESTRICTION STATUS ..................... 270
FIGURE 199: LEVEL ACCESS SELECTION ............................ 271
FIGURE 200: ACCESS DENIED DISPLAY................................ 273
FIGURE 201: ACCESS CODE ...................................................... 273
FIGURE 202: ACCESS CODE OPTIONS ................................... 274
FIGURE 203: ACCESS RESTRICTION STATUS ..................... 274
FIGURE 204: FLOW MAX HARDWIRE CONFIGURATION 281
FIGURE 205: DETAILED HARDWIRE CONNECTIONS ....... 282
FIGURE 206: DETAILED MASTER VALVE AND STATION
CONNECTIONS ............................................................................. 283
FIGURE 207: SUBMASTER ADDRESS ENTRY ....................... 286
FIGURE 208: MASTER VALVE/PUMP SELECTION.............. 287
FIGURE 209: FLOW METER 1 CONNECTION ....................... 287
Table of Contents
xiii
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FIGURE 210: PUMP CONNECTION........................................... 288
FIGURE 211: MASTER VALVE 1 CONNECTION ................... 288
FIGURE 212: MASTER VALVE 2 CONNECTION ................... 289
FIGURE 213: NORMALLY OPEN VALVE CONNECTION.... 289
FIGURE 214: LAST ADDRESS ENTRY...................................... 290
FIGURE 215: FLOW METER SELECTION............................... 290
FIGURE 216: K VALUE ENTRY.................................................. 291
FIGURE 217: OFFSET VALUE ENTRY ..................................... 291
FIGURE 218: MAIN FLOW LIMIT ENTRY .............................. 292
FIGURE 219: MAIN LIMIT OPTIONS........................................ 293
FIGURE 220: MAIN FLOW MAXIMUM LIMIT....................... 293
FIGURE 221: UNSCHED FLOW LIMIT..................................... 294
FIGURE 222: NORMAL MODE ................................................... 295
FIGURE 223: CONTROLLER OPTIONS ................................... 295
FIGURE 224: FLOW METER CONNECTION........................... 296
FIGURE 225: FLOW METER CONNECTION........................... 297
FIGURE 226: MASTER VALVE CONNECTION ...................... 298
FIGURE 227: AUTO LIMITS........................................................ 300
FIGURE 228: CONFIGURATION BLOCK DIAGRAM............ 303
FIGURE 229: SUBMASTER REAL TIME REVIEW................. 304
FIGURE 230: SATELLITE REAL TIME REVIEW................... 306
FIGURE 231: PROGRAM PARAMETERS................................. 306
FIGURE 232: SUBMASTER CONFIGURATION ...................... 307
FIGURE 233: SATELLITE 001 CONFIGURATION ................. 307
FIGURE 234: SATELLITE 002 CONFIGURATION ................. 307
FIGURE 235: ANALOG MULTIMETER .................................... 315
FIGURE 236: CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK........................... 320
FIGURE 237: POLARITY CHECK .............................................. 323
FIGURE 238: +8 VOLT POLARITY CHECK............................. 326
Table of Tables
TABLE 1: SETUP OPTIONS AND SYSTEM DEFAULTS..........36
TABLE 2: PROGRAM 1 WATERING SCHEDULE ....................90
TABLE 3: CALIBRATION TABLE.............................................. 235
TABLE 4: RAIN MASTER K AND OFFSET VALUE ............... 248
TABLE 5: ACCESS LEVEL OPTIONS........................................ 272
TABLE 6: FLOW MAX SAMPLE WORKSHEET ..................... 301
xiv
Table of Contents
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
C
ongratulations… You have just acquired the worlds most
advanced, trouble free, solid state irrigation controller.
Rain Master is pleased to offer the first irrigation controller with
expandable capabilities that can grow your needs become more
complex and demanding.
As you become acquainted with the Evolution DX2's total
capabilities, you will realize how simple it is to program and
operate.
Thank you for choosing Rain Master Irrigation Systems.
About This Manual
This manual is designed to serve as a User Manual, Reference
Source, and Maintenance Guide. The procedures are presented
in systematic steps to easily complete a specific task. The menus
throughout these chapters are identified with a sequential listing
that starts out with a pointing finger icon (as shown below). This
presentation is intended to quickly indicate the menus in the
proper order to arrive at the correct programming display screen.
Chapter 1:
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
F1=Main Menu
F2=Program
F3=New Program
Page 1
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Figure 1: Evolution DX2 Pedestal Enclosure
Page 2
Chapter 1: Introduction
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Every attempt has been made to show the appropriate screen
display throughout the step-by-step process. In cases where a
sub-menu is not shown, refer back to the preceding pointing
finger icon. Following the listing from that point will easily
direct you to the correct sub-menu.
The Evolution DX2 Controller was designed to accommodate a
wide range of features and capabilities with unequaled versatility
and performance. At the same time, it remains extremely simple
to use.
In addition to being the detailed definitive source for all facets of
the controller operation, this manual contains extensive
troubleshooting information required to resolve field
maintenance issues.
Some features of this manual are highlighted below:
Chapter 2: System Basics introduces you to the irrigation
controller’s front panel by defining basic key
operations.
Chapter 3: Getting Started is designed as a quick reference
guide. This chapter allows you to initialize a
controller and enter a new program in less than 5
minutes.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting includes field troubleshooting
flow charts as well as detailed alarm warning
information. Specific appendices have been
provided with emphasis on troubleshooting
techniques as they relate to the irrigation controller.
Appendix G: Troubleshooting Basics addresses basic
troubleshooting principles including an introduction
to volt/ohm meter concepts.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Page 3
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Features and Capabilities
Microprocessor-based control of irrigation systems is no longer a
luxury. Today’s culture is environmentally sensitive, exact
control of precious water resources is a must. Even with low
precipitation irrigation, excessive run times mean wasted water.
Rain Master believes in minimizing waste by maximizing water
application efficiency.
The Evolution DX2 is designed to provide precise control of
irrigation delivery systems. The water savings realized from
these control efficiencies will help ensure an adequate supply of
clean water for personal needs, as well as for landscapes, which
are so important to the quality of our lives.
Evolution DX2 Features and Specifications
Hardware Features
•
Configuration options 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 or 48
stations. Dedicated outputs for 2 Normally Closed
Master Valves, 1 normally Open Master Valve, 1 Pump,
and auxiliary 24 VAC.
•
Connectivity for 4 input sensing devices. 4 pulse input
type devices e.g. flow sensors, flow meters, ET device,
rain gauge, and anemometer.
•
80 character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with 24-key
membrane keypad.
•
Built-in remote control jack. Adaptor for permanent
remote internal mount available.
•
Built-in transient protection.
•
Optional lightning protection available.
Page 4
Chapter 1: Introduction
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
•
Audible tone(s) for valid or invalid operator entry.
•
Lifetime retention of the user's program and date/time,
without the use of batteries.
•
All outputs are protected from field wiring short circuits.
•
Built in amperage meter to accurately measure and
diagnose valve solenoid electrical problems.
•
Modular architecture. Modular output boards (6 or 12
station) facilitate maintenance and eliminates total
controller down time.
•
Available in painted or stainless steel wall mount cabinet
or pedestal enclosure.
Scheduling Capabilities
•
Operation of 12 conventional programs with 8 start
times, 48 ISC (individual station control) or a
combination of each
•
Watering based upon 14-day schedules, skip day
schedules, or 31-day schedules
•
Continuous cycling of programs based upon user
established start and end times, with a programmable
delay/soak time
•
Water budget per program from 0 to 999% in 1%
increments for adjustment of program run times
•
Program by time
Chapter 1: Introduction
Page 5
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
•
Programmable monthly total water usage, program
terminates upon over budget irrigation
•
Quick station programming allows groups of stations to
be programmed with the same runtime
•
Programmable water window
Program Setup Options
•
Program overlap protection or concurrent operation
•
Irrigation programs, lighting programs, security, etc.
(Non-irrigation programs are independent of rain
shutdown mode)
•
Inter-station delay from 0 to 255 seconds
•
Runtimes from 1 second to 24 hours programmable in
hours/minutes or minutes/seconds
•
Master valve selections: 2 Normally Closed Valves or
Normally Open Valves, with programmable delay from
0 to 600 seconds
Maintenance and Alarm Diagnostic Capabilities
•
Page 6
Flow monitoring. Automatic alarm processing (which
provides station and/or master valve shut down and
program advance as required) diagnosing and reporting
station underflow and overflow, mainline breaks, and
unscheduled flow. Maximum Upper Flow Limit is 2000
GPM.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
•
Electrical field wire monitoring. Automatic alarm
processing (which provides station shutdown and
program advance) for station over current, short circuits,
broken field wiring or faulty solenoids.
•
Power monitoring. Automatic alarm processing/
reporting for power outages and power restoration.
Intelligent program resumption for all outages or power
glitches, no lost cycles or water window violations.
•
Communication monitoring. Automatic alarm
generation/ reporting for lost communications or
restoration when using hardwire communications.
Automatic fault isolation of communication wiring
problems to wire path between controllers.
•
Diagnostic lights (LEDs) for all station outputs as well
as the dedicated outputs:
o
MV1(Master Valve #1)
o
MV2 (Master Valve #2)
o
N.O (Normally Open Master Valve)
o
PUMP
Lights indicate when 24 VAC is at output terminal.
•
Built-in Test (BIT) functions allow selected controller
circuitry to be field-tested.
•
Manual test mode. Allows user to automatically
advance from station to station using manual run time
while displaying valve solenoid electrical current for
each station as well as station flow in GPM.
•
Manual station and Manual multi-station modes. Turns
Chapter 1: Introduction
Page 7
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
on any station for user entered runtime and automatically
selects usage of the proper Master Valve and/or Pump
for this station. Valve solenoid electrical current is
displayed. Multi-station mode allows any single station
or output to be turned on individually or in combination
with any other station(s). Valve solenoid electrical
current is displayed.
•
Manually entered program. Allows user to enter a
one-time program to be run immediately or scheduled
for later in the day. The manual program is independent
of automatic programs and will start only one time.
•
Manual start of automatic programs (1-12). Start any
program independent of the scheduled start time and
water day.
Miscellaneous Features
•
English/Spanish language selection.
•
Automatic limit setup (learn mode) for flow and current.
Global percentages adjust for limit establishment.
•
Omit by date allows the user to enter up to 15 dates to
exclude irrigation.
•
Operates as a stand-alone or under Central Computer
System.
•
Fertilizer injector station with programmable delay from
0 to 255 seconds.
Page 8
Chapter 1: Introduction
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
•
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max. This exclusive feature allows controllers
with a single point of connection to share a pump,
master valves, and flow meters without the need for
peripheral wiring/relays. All flow limits are dynamically
managed as stations across controller’s transition off and
on. Features include:
o
Automatic protection and report for main line
breaks, unscheduled flow, station high and low flow
o
Read flow at any controller
o
Dynamic monitor shows system status at all times
o
Pump protection during exception conditions
Electrical Specifications
•
Input Power Required: 117 VAC +/- 15%, 60 HZ, 20
VA, plus load current.
•
Maximum load current per station or master valve
output: 1 AMP.
•
Maximum combined load current: 2 AMPS.
•
No batteries required.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Page 9
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 2
System Basics
The Evolution DX2 Controller contains a comprehensive
feature set to support virtually any conceivable irrigation
system/configuration. In addition to the more traditional
irrigation features, the controller supports multiple sensor inputs,
central communications control, extensive fault diagnostics and
specialized electronics to insure that product reliability is not
compromised. Through use of selected “setup” options, the
controller can be adapted to a specific irrigation application.
Chapter 2:
Chapter 2: System Basics
System Basics
Although the controller provides numerous features and options,
the user interface remains extremely simple. Consequently the
operation of the controller remains “user friendly.”
Page 9
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Evolution DX2 Controller Front Panel
The Evolution DX2 Controller Touch Key Front Panel provides
all the necessary functions and control to operate and program
the Evolution DX2 Controller.
Figure 2-1: Evolution DX2 Controller Front Panel identifies the
location of all touch keys and features.
REMOTE
CONTROL
SAT 09:15:11AM VALID PGM: NONE
05/01/93 WK1 [F1]=MAIN MENU
CONTRAST
PROGRAM
ON/OFF
Ï
Ð
LANGUAGE
F1
F4
F2
F5
F3
SAT
7
8
9
F6
WED
4
THU
5
FRI
6
QUIT
SUN MON TUE
1
2
3
0
ENTER
Figure 2: Evolution DX2 Controller Face Panel
The Evolution DX2 Controller Front Panel provides the
following features:
•
The display contains 2 lines, each line capable of
displaying 40 characters.
•
Combination Day/Numeric Key Pad.
•
Enter Key - Executes all keypad entries.
•
Six Function keys used to select all program menus.
•
Full Range Display Contrast Control.
Page 10
Chapter 2: System Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
•
Program On/Off - Executes or stops any program.
•
Ability to select English or Spanish language.
•
Up/Down Arrow Keys allow advancement through
menus.
•
Immediate return to the base screen, using the Quit key.
•
Distinctive beep validates each key entry (Touch Tone).
•
Built-in Remote Control Connector.
The display screen changes accordingly to the activity being
performed.
Chapter 2: System Basics
Page 11
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Base Screen
After controller initialization (see Chapter 3), the base screen,
depicted in Figure 2-2, is displayed.
SAT 09:15:11AM VALID PGM: NONE
06/18/96 WK1 |F1|=MAIN MENU
Figure 3: Base Screen
•
To alter the contrast of the display, use the Contrast
keys.
•
The base screen displays the day, time, date and
additional information, depending upon how the
controller is configured.
•
The VALID PGM: section of the screen alternates every
seven seconds, displaying either the program number(s)
or the satellite address. All existing programs will be
listed.
Dashed program numbers such as (2 -5) indicate a range
of programs which includes all numbers within the
range.
Numbers separated by commas such as (2, 4, and 6)
indicate individual program numbers.
•
When the Evolution DX2 controller displays the base
screen information, the controller functions in the
"automatic mode," meaning that any valid program(s)
will automatically start at established program start
time(s).
•
The manual function (see Chapter 8) disables the
automatic mode. The controller has a built in time-out
function (2 hour time-out) which returns the controller to
the base screen (automatic mode) if the user
inadvertently leaves the controller in some other screen.
Page 12
Chapter 2: System Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
•
User prompts for valid keystroke entry are designated by
| | (vertical bars) with the key name appearing
between the bars.
•
The entry |F1|=MAIN MENU prompts the user to
press the F1 key to access the Main Menu.
•
From the base screen, pressing F1 will display the main
menu.
Chapter 2: System Basics
Page 13
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Main Menu
The main menu indicates five of the function keys used to access
different functions.
|F1|=PROGRAM |F2|=ISC |F3|=STATUS
|F4|=MANUAL & RAIN OFF |F5|=SETUP
|µ|
F Keys
Up Arrow
Figure 4: Main Menu
Note:
|µ|
The F1 key, which was previously used to select the
main menu, is now used to select the Program
option. The use of the function keys changes
depending upon the contents of the screen display.
This symbol in the main menu indicates you press
the up arrow key on the controller to return to the
previous display.
In this case, the previous display is the base screen.
The previous screen would change depending upon
which menu options (function keys) you had
previously chosen.
Page 14
Chapter 2: System Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Using the Controller Keys
Throughout this manual, the following symbols are used to
represent the controller keys you use to move through the menu
options and to view or change the settings of your Evolution
DX2 controller.
F1
F2
Press the associated function key (F1 to F6) to
select the option shown on the display screen.
©
Press the up arrow key to move to the
previous screen.
ª
Press the down arrow key to move to the
next screen.
1
0
8
9
5
6
2
3
Use the numeric keypad section to enter
numbers.
ENTER
Use the keypad section to enter days of the
week.
SAT
WED THU
FRI
SUN MON TUE
Chapter 2: System Basics
Page 15
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Function Keys (continued):
DARK
LIGHT
Press the DARK key to increase display
contrast and the LIGHT key to decrease
display contrast.
Note: Maximum LIGHT setting will appear
as a blank display.
ENTER
QUIT
The ENTER key is used to complete entry of a
number or day of the week. For example, to
ENTER the number 1, press the 1 key and then
press the ENTER key.
Press the QUIT key to immediately go to the base
screen. The QUIT key bypasses any previous
screens and displays the base screen.
LANGUAGE
Press LANGUAGE to change from English to
Espanol or from Espanol to English.
PROGRAM
ON/OFF
Press the PROGRAM ON/OFF key to
immediately turn a program on or off.
Page 16
Chapter 2: System Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
"Beep" Responses
To provide user feedback for keyboard entry, two different beeps
or tones are omitted. A single beep indicates a valid or correct
entry. Rapid successive beeps indicate an invalid entry. For
example, from the base screen, select|F1|and a single beep is
heard. This indicates|F1|is a valid selection. However, from
the base screen select the down arrow and multiple beeps are
heard.
System Configuration
The DX2 Evolution Controller is housed in an all weather
enclosure containing the following assemblies:
•
Keyboard Main Panel Assembly
•
Main Power Switch Box Assembly
•
Master Valve/Pump/Power Board Assembly
•
Station Output Board Assembly
(Quantity varies depending on station configuration)
•
Communication Board Assembly (Optional)
•
Sensor Terminal Board Assembly (Optional)
Keyboard Main Panel
The Keyboard Main Panel assembly consists of a main
microprocessor control board and an optional sensor control
board, which would attached to the main board. Four cables
from this assembly provide the connections to the additional
internal assemblies which include the Master Valve/Pump/Power
board, the Communications board (optional), the Sensor
Terminal (optional), and the Station Output board(s).
Chapter 2: System Basics
Page 17
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Main Power Switch Box
The Main Power Switch Box assembly contains the controller
main power switch, a dual ground fault interrupter receptacle and
a step-down transformer delivering 12 VAC and 24 VAC.
The ground fault interrupter (GFI) provides an exclusive safety
feature against electrical power hazards. The GFI can sense and
detect any degree of power line shorts and will immediately shut
down the power preventing electrical damage or injury. The GFI
includes a Test switch and a Reset switch. When the Test switch
is pressed, all power will shut down indicating proper operation
of the internal control circuitry. Pressing the Reset switch will
restore power operation. The diagram of Figure 2-5: identifies
the Main Power Switch Box and associated wiring.
Master Valve/Pump/Power Board
The Master Valve/Pump/Power board provides the four outputs
for Master Valve 1, Master Valve 2, Normally Open Valve and
Pump. Additionally, the assembly distributes the 12 VAC and
24 VAC through their respective fuses to the associated
controller assemblies. Figure 2-6: illustrates typical connections
for Master Valve and Station connections.
Station Output Board
The Station Output board delivers the 24 VAC required
operating valve solenoids, lighting systems, security systems,
etc. A Station Output board may be configured with six stations
or 12 stations. The controller enclosure will accept a maximum
of four output boards providing control for a total of up to 48
stations.
Each board is equipped with two common terminals used for
circuit ground return. All common terminals of a multiple
station configuration are essentially identical and may be
interchanged among the boards for wiring convenience.
Page 18
Chapter 2: System Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Communication Board (optional)
The Communication Board provides the means for
communication among controllers and/or the Central Computer.
The available communication options are Hardwire, Radio or
Phone, communication provides the capability for any number of
configurations.
Sensor Terminal Board (optional)
The Sensor Terminal board provides the direct link between the
flow sensors, and/or weather station devices and the controller.
The flow and weather sensing option provides four sets of
terminal connections; two inputs for flow sensors (or one flow
and one ET), one input for a rain sensor and one input for a wind
sensor. All inputs are dedicated and calibrated to their respective
weather devices.
Chapter 2: System Basics
Page 19
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
DX2 Pedestal Controller Assembly Layout
The assembly layout location within the controller enclosure is
depicted in Figure 2-4.
1 - Keyboard Main Panel
2 - Main Power Switch Box
3 - MV/Pump/Power Bd.
4 - Station Output Bd.
5 - Communications Bd.
6 - Sensor Terminal Bd.
Rear
Front
Figure 5: Pedestal Controller Assembly Layout
Page 20
Chapter 2: System Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Figure 6: AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram
Chapter 2: System Basics
Page 21
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
MASTER
VALVE
ZONE 2
VALVE
PCDX2-MV
PCDX2-OT12
BLUE
12VAC
ORANGE
24VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
STATION 2
MV1 MV2 N.O. PUMP COM
COM
TO MASTER VALVE
TO ZONE 2 VALVE
DWG DXMV10A
Figure 7: Master Valve and Station Connection
Page 22
Chapter 2: System Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 3
Getting Started
W
hen a controller is new from the factory, when it is repaired,
or updated, the controller must be initialized. This process must
be performed before any programming or operations take place.
The initialization process is unique in that the sequence of entries
provides default settings for all programs of the controller.
When all entries are completed, the initialization screens will no
longer be available; however, settings may be changed later by
referring to the instructions given in Chapter 4: Setup.
Alternatively, changes to initialization are also possible
(assuming it has not completed), by turning the power off then
on, this restarts the entire procedure.
Initialization Procedure
Apply power to the controller and the Language
options are displayed.
It may be necessary to adjust the contrast in the
display by using the DARK and LIGHT front panel
keys.
|F1|=ENGLISH
|F2|=ESPANOL
Figure 8: Language Selection
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Getting Started
Note:
Chapter 3:
Step 1
Page 23
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
There are two options:
•
F1=ENGLISH - displays all controller menus
and settings in English.
•
F2=ESPANOL - displays all controller menus
and settings in Spanish.
Step 2
Select F1=ENGLISH. The menu changes to the
YEAR Entry display.
Step 3
Enter the YEAR, and then press ENTER. Four
numbers must be entered, as depicted in Figure 3-2.
YEAR: __
ENTER YEAR (yyyy)
Figure 9: Year Entry
Step 4
Enter the MONTH. Use 1 for January, 2 for
February, etc., and then press ENTER, as depicted in
Figure 3-3.
MONTH:
ENTER MONTH (1-12)
Figure 10: Month Entry
Step 5
Enter the DAY OF THE MONTH. The day must be
between 1 and 31, and then press ENTER, as
depicted in Figure 3-4.
DAY OF THE MONTH:
ENTER DAY OF THE MONTH (1-31)
Figure 11: Day of the Month Entry
Page 24
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 6
DX2 User Manual
Select the DAY of the week from the keypad
numbers 1 through 7 (Sun through Sat), then press
ENTER, as depicted in Figure 3-5.
DAY:
ENTER DAY OF THE WEEK |SUN|-|SAT|
Figure 12: Day of the Week Entry
Step 7
Enter the TIME in hours and minutes (HH:MM).
Select function key F1 to toggle from AM to PM, as
depicted in Figure 3-6.
TIME: : AM
ENTER TIME (HH:MM) |F1|= AM/PM
Figure 13: Time of Day Entry
Then press ENTER to advance to the Master Valve
Options.
Master Valve/Pump Program Default
Options
The final initialization screens establish default
options for usage of a particular Master Valve and/or
Pump. Once established, all 12 programs and all
ISC's will be affected. Individual programs or ISC
settings may be modified at any time by following
the procedures given in Chapter 4: Setup. The
Master Valve selections are as follows:
•
F1=MV1 - Master Valve 1 (Normally Closed)
•
F2=MV2 - Master Valve 2 (Normally Closed)
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Page 25
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 8
DX2 User Manual
•
F3=N.O. - Normally Open Master Valve
•
F4= NONE - Master Valve Not Used
Select the appropriate Master Valve configuration
for a particular irrigation system, as depicted in
Figure 3-7.
IS THERE A MASTER VALVE
|F1|= MV1 |F2|= MV2 |F3|= N.O. |F4|= NONE
Figure 14: Master Valve Options
Note:
Step 9
If F4=NONE is selected, the Pump display will not
appear.
Select the appropriate Pump configuration.
F1 = Uses Pump
F2 = No Pump Used
USES NO PUMP
|F1|= PUMP |F2|=NONE
Figure 15: Pump Options
Step 10
This completes the initialization procedure. Verify
the default base screen display has the correct
information.
TUE 04:53:06PM VALID PGM: NONE
06/18/96 WK1 |F1|= MAIN MENU
Figure 16: Base Screen Display
Page 26
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The default base screen displays the current day, time and date.
In addition, VALID PGM: NONE, |F1|=MAIN MENU and
the current week of a 2 week watering schedule are also shown.
•
VALID PGM: NONE - indicates that there are currently
no valid programs in the controller. See Chapter 5 for
details on entering and changing Evolution DX2
irrigation programs.
•
|F1|=MAIN MENU - indicates you are to press the
F1 key to display Evolution DX2's Main Menu.
Background information about menus and navigating
through the menu displays is given in Chapter 2: System
Basics. Complete details on using the menus are given in
the subsequent sections of this manual.
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Page 27
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Creating a New Program
To create a program, the following parameters must be
set:
• Program Number
• Watering Day cycle
• Start times
• Station Run times
Using the 2 week (14 day cycle), this sample program sets up the
parameters as follows:
Program 1
Water Days
Start Times
Stations
Week 1: Mon-Wed-Fri
2:00 AM
1
5 min.
Week 2: Mon-Fri
10:00 PM
2
10 min.
3
7 min.
1
SAT 09:15:11AM VALID PGM: NONE
05/01/96 WK1 ‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬MAIN MENU
2
‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬PROGRAM ‫ ׀‬F2‫= ׀‬ISC ‫ ׀‬F3‫= ׀‬STATUS
‫ ׀‬F4‫ =׀‬MANUAL & RAIN OFF ‫ ׀‬F5‫= ׀‬SETUP
3
‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬MODIFY PROGRAM ‫׀‬F2‫=׀‬REVIEW PROGRAM
‫׀‬F3‫= ׀‬NEW PROGRAM ‫׀‬F4‫ =׀‬CLEAR PROGRAM ‫׀½׀‬
F3
PROGRAM NUMBER: P
ENTER PROGRAM NUMBER (1-12)
F1
4
5
Run Time
P1 ‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬14 DAY CYCLE ‫׀‬F2‫=׀‬SKIP BY DAY
‫׀‬F3‫= ׀‬31 DAY CYCLE
NOW=F1
Page 28
F1
‫׀½׀‬
‫׀½׀‬
‫׀½׀‬
F1
ENTER
F1
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
6
DX2 User Manual
P1: NONE TODAY: TUE WK2
ENTER WEEK 1 WATER DAYS‫׀‬SUN‫׀ – ׀‬SAT‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀ ׀‬
MON
2
WED
4
FRI
6
ENTER
7
P1: NONE TODAY: SAT WK1
ENTER WEEK 2 WATER DAYS‫׀‬SUN‫׀ – ׀‬SAT‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀ ׀‬
MON
2
FRI
6
8
P1: START TIME 1: :
AM
ENTER TIME (HH:MM) ‫׀‬F1‫=׀‬AM/PM
MON
2
0
9
P1: START TIME 2: :
AM
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)‫׀‬F1‫=׀‬AM/PM‫׀½׀׀¾׀‬
10
P1 ‫׀‬F1‫ =׀‬STATION RUN TIME
‫׀‬F2‫ =׀‬QUICK STATION PROGRAMMING
11
P1 STATION NUMBER:
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-48)
‫׀½׀‬
12
P1 STATION 01 RUN TIME:
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
:
‫׀½׀‬
5
13
P1 STATION 02 RUN TIME:
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
:
‫׀½׀‬
F1
14
P1 STATION 03 RUN TIME:
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
:
‫׀½׀‬
SAT
7
‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀‬
MON
2
‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀‬
0
0
¾
F1
ENTER
F1
SUN
1
THUR
ENTER
ENTER
0
ENTER
ENTER
QUIT
This completes Program 1 entry. Program 1 will start on its
scheduled water days and start times. The base screen display
will now show "VALID PGM: 1."
Chapter 3: Getting Started
¾
ENTER
0
0
ENTER
Page 29
¾
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Modify a Program
This example demonstrates the methods of changing the
parameters of an existing program.
Example:
To change start time#1 of program 1 to 3:15 A.M.
and change the run time on station 2 to 5 minutes,
perform the following entries:
1
SAT 09:15:11AM VALID PGM: 1
2
‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬PROGRAM ‫ ׀‬F2‫= ׀‬ISC ‫ ׀‬F3‫= ׀‬STATUS
‫ ׀‬F4‫ =׀‬MANUAL & RAIN OFF ‫ ׀‬F5‫= ׀‬SETUP
3
4
05/01/96 WK1
6
7
F1
‫׀½׀‬
‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬MODIFY PROGRAM ‫׀‬F2‫=׀‬REVIEW PROGRAM
‫׀‬F3‫= ׀‬NEW PROGRAM ‫׀‬F4‫ =׀‬CLEAR PROGRAM ‫׀½׀‬
PROGRAM NUMBER: P
ENTER PROGRAM NUMBER (1-12)
5
F1
‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬MAIN MENU
‫׀½׀‬
F1
SUN
1
P1 ‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬PROGRAM START
‫׀‬F2‫=׀‬WATER DAYS
‫׀‬F3‫= ׀‬STATIONS ‫׀‬F4‫= ׀‬PERCENT ‫׀‬F5‫= ׀‬SEND ‫׀½׀‬
P1: START TIME1:
‫׀‬F1‫=׀‬AM/PM
2:00 AMENTER TIME (HH:MM)
‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀‬
P1 ‫׀‬F1‫ =׀‬PROGRAM START ‫׀‬F2‫ =׀‬WATER DAYS
‫׀‬F3‫ =׀‬STATIONS ‫׀‬F4‫ =׀‬PERCENT ‫׀‬F5‫ =׀‬SEND ‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀‬
Page 30
ENTER
F1
TUE
3
SUN
1
THU
5
F3
Chapter 3: Getting Started
ENTER
¾
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
8
9
DX2 User Manual
P1 STATIONS: 1-3
P1 ‫׀‬F1‫ =׀‬STATION RUN TIME
‫׀‬F2‫ =׀‬QUICK STATION PROGRAMMING
‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀‬
¾
‫׀½׀ ׀¾׀‬
F1
10
P1 STATION NUMBER:
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-48)
‫׀½׀‬
MON
2
ENTER
11
P1 STATION 02 RUN TIME:
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
‫׀½׀‬
THU
5
ENTER
:10
Chapter 3: Getting Started
QUIT
Page 31
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Program On/Off
This example demonstrates how to activate or deactivate a
single program.
Example:
To activate Program 1, perform the following
entries:
SAT 09:15:11AM VALID PGM: 1
05/01/96 WK1
‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬MAIN MENU
PROGRAM NUMBER:
ENTER NUMBER (0-12) 0=ALL OFF
Note:
Page 32
PROGRAM
ON/ OFF
SUN
1
ENTER
To deactivate a running program, repeat the same
key strokes.
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Manual Station Test Cycle
To test stations manually:
All manual operations are performed through the Manual &
Rain Off Menu.
Note: Pressing QUIT will cease all manual operations.
Example:
1
Turn on all stations for 5 minutes.
SAT 09:15:11AM VALID PGM: 1
05/01/96 WK1
F1
‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬MAIN MENU
2
‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬PROGRAM ‫ ׀‬F2‫= ׀‬ISC ‫ ׀‬F3‫= ׀‬STATUS
‫ ׀‬F4‫ =׀‬MANUAL & RAIN OFF ‫ ׀‬F5‫= ׀‬SETUP
‫׀½׀‬
3
MANUAL: ‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬TEST
4
OPERATION TIME PER STATION:
‫ ׀‬F2‫ = ׀‬MULTI-STATION
‫ ׀‬F3‫= ׀‬STATION ‫ ׀‬F4‫ =׀‬RAIN OFF
‫׀½׀‬
:
ENTER TIME PER STATION (HH:MM)
‫׀½׀‬
F4
F1
THU
5
ENTER
Each station will operate one at a time in sequential order for the
specified period of 5 minutes.
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Page 33
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Rain Shutdown
Example:
1
2
3
4
5
To place all irrigation programs in rain shutdown,
perform the following:
SAT 09:15:11AM VALID PGM: 1
05/01/96 WK1
F1
‫׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬MAIN MENU
‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬PROGRAM ‫ ׀‬F2‫= ׀‬ISC ‫ ׀‬F3‫= ׀‬STATUS
‫ ׀‬F4‫ =׀‬MANUAL & RAIN OFF ‫ ׀‬F5‫= ׀‬SETUP
‫׀½׀‬
MANUAL: ‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬TEST
F4
‫ ׀‬F2‫ = ׀‬MULTI-STATION
‫ ׀‬F3‫= ׀‬STATION ‫ ׀‬F4‫ =׀‬RAIN OFF
‫׀½׀‬
F4
‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬RAIN SHUTDOWN ‫ ׀‬F2‫ = ׀‬NO WATER WINDOW
‫ ׀‬F3‫= ׀‬PROGRAMMABLE RAIN SHUTDOWN
‫׀½׀‬
F1
RAIN SHUTDOWN: OFF
‫ ׀‬F1‫ = ׀‬ON ‫ ׀‬F2‫ = ׀‬OFF
Note:
Page 34
(AUTOMATIC MODE)
‫׀½׀‬
F1
QUIT
The Rain Shutdown message will appear in the base
screen.
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 4
Setup
Because all irrigation applications are not identical, the
Evolution DX2 controller has been designed to allow users to
establish a wide variety of individual programmable options.
These options include changing configuration of programs,
Individual Station Control (ISC), irrigation stations, the
controller, and sensors. The setup function provides the
mechanism for tailoring the Evolution DX2 controller operation
to a specific irrigation application.
Chapter 4: Setup
Setup
Factory defaults have been established to allow
most users to skip the setup options and proceed to
basic programming (Chapter 5: Program Entry).
The following table summarizes the setup options
and factory default values.
Chapter 4:
Note:
Page 35
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
System Defaults
Table 1: Setup Options and System Defaults
Setup
Program
Function
Cycle Mode
start times,
continuous cycle
Defaults
start times
Overlap Protection
on, off
on
Irrigation Program
yes, no
yes
Omit by Date
on, off
on
0-255, 0=Off
0
HH:MM,
MM:SS
HH:MM
Water Limit Reached
give warning, stop
watering
give
warning
Master Valve Used
MV1, MV2,
Dependent upon
normally open MV,
power-on
none
initialization
(see Chapter 3)
Uses Pump
uses a pump, uses no
pump
Set at
initialization
(see Chapter 3)
on, off
on
0-600 seconds
0
Station Delay Time
Time Format
State of Master Valve
between Stations
Master Valve Delay
Turn On Time
Page 36
Options
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Table 1: Setup Options and System Defaults (continued)
Setup
ISC
Function
Options
Defaults
start times
Overlap Protection
start times,
continuous cycle
on, off
Irrigation Program
yes, no
yes
Omit by Date
on, off
on
0-255, 0=Off
0
HH:MM, MM:SS
HH:MM
Cycle Mode
Station Delay Time
Time Format
Water Limit Reached give warning, stop
watering
on
give warning
Master Valve Used
MV1, MV2,
Set at initialization
normally open MV, (see Chapter 3)
none
Pump
uses pump, uses no Set at initialization
pump
(see Chapter 3)
State of Master Valve
between Stations
Master Valve Delay
Turn On Time
Chapter 4: Setup
on, off
on
0-600 seconds
0
Page 37
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Table 1: Setup Options and System Defaults (continued)
Setup
Stations
Page 38
Function
Options
Defaults
Low Limit Flow
Checking
enable, disable
disable
Upper Limit Flow
Checking
enable, disable
disable
Low Limit Current Check
enable, disable
disable
Upper Limit Current
Check
enable, disable
enable
Maximum Current Limit
0.0 to 1.0 amps
1.0
Minimum Current Limit
0.0 to 1.0 amps
0.05
Maximum Flow Limit
0 to 2000 gallons
per minute
500
Minimum Flow Limit
0 to 2000 gallons
per minute
0
Type
normal, injector
normal
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Table 1: Setup Options and System Defaults (continued)
Setup
Controller
Function
Options
Defaults
Main Line Flow Limit
0 to 2000 gallons
per minute
2000
Monthly Water Limit
1-9,999,999
gallons, none
none
Flow Meter used for
Limit Comparisons
meter 1, meter 2,
sum of meters 1
and 2
meter 1
Flow Delay before
Limit Checks
1-6 minutes
2 minutes
Unscheduled Limit
(0-2000) gallons
200
any day of the year
none
Time
12 hour, 24 hour
12 hour
Date
month/day/
year, day/
month/year
month/day/
year
English, Espanol
English
none/set
none
Omit by Date
(15 allowed)
Language
Access Code
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 39
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Table 1: Setup Options and System Defaults (continued)
Setup
Functions
Options
Defaults
satellite, submaster,
Flow Max
satellite
Communications Type
(If submaster is selected
mode)
Radio/ wire
Phone
Trunk
Radio/wire
Address
(If submaster is selected
mode)
0-255
239
Program Assignment
Moisture Sensor
1- 12
none
Trip Points (1-12)
0-200
0
enabled disabled
disabled
Flow 1- K Value
0-56000
0
Flow 1- Offset Value
0-26000
0
Flow 2- K Value
0-56000
0
Flow 2- Offset Value
0-26000
0
Configuration
Operational Modes
Sensors
Sensor Status
Page 40
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F5 Setup
F1
Program
Program
Setup Program is used to specify operational controls for the
programs used by the Evolution DX2. The following parameters
and options are available in the Setup Program:
•
Cycle Mode: Select start times or continuous cycle
•
Overlap Protection: Select station start time overlap
•
Irrigation Program: If NO is selected for a program,
then the controller Rain Shutdown mode will not affect
program operation.
•
Omit By Date Enable: Select non-watering dates.
•
Station Delay Time - Set delay time between station
watering start times.
•
Time Format - Select time in hours and minutes or
minutes and seconds.
•
At Water Limit - Select water control option to stop
watering or give warning if water limit is exceeded.
•
Master Valve - Select master valve configuration.
•
Pump - Select pump configuration.
•
Master Valve On Between Stations - On or Off.
•
Master Valve Delay Turn On Time - Set delay of turn on
time.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 41
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The Evolution DX2 Controller allows each program to have its
own unique set of setup parameters. Individual setup parameters
on a per program basis provide absolute programming
independence.
Program Setup Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the program entry screen through the
following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F1=Program
PROGRAM NUMBERS: P
ENTER PROGRAM NUMBER (1-12)
|½|
Figure 17: Program Entry
Step 2
Enter the program number, the program number
must be between 1 and 12, then press ENTER.
Step 3
Cycle Mode
Press F1=CHANGE OPTION to select one of the
two following options:
Page 42
•
START TIMES - Start a program based upon
user-defined (programmed) start times (up to 8
start times available).
•
CONTINUOUS CYCLE - Allows a program to
be run continuously during a user defined water
window (start/end time). Upon completion of
the first cycle, a user defined soak delay occurs
and the program starts again. Operation repeats
in this fashion until the end time is reached.
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
P # CYCLE MODE: START TIMES
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 18: Cycle Mode
Step 4
Overlap Protection
Press the Down Arrow to display the Overlap
Protection option screen.
Overlap protection prevents multiple stations from
being on simultaneously if the station start times
overlap.
Select one of the two following options:
•
ON - Allows only one station to be on at a time,
regardless of programmed start times.
•
OFF- Allows multiple stations to be on
simultaneously if station start times overlap.
P # CYCLE MODE: START TIMES
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 19: Overlap Protection
Step 5
Irrigation Program
An Irrigation Program is defined as a watering
program responding to rain shutdown features and
Flow Max control.
The IRRIGATION PROGRAM: YES option sets a
program to respond to rain shutdown and features
such as stop watering.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 43
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The IRRIGATION PROGRAM: NO option
disables commands associated with rain shutdown or
stop watering. This option is primarily used for
controlling lighting, security gates, water fountains,
etc.
Note:
Warning:
Selecting IRRIGATION PROGRAM: YES does not
place the program into the Rain Shutdown mode.
Refer to "Rain Off" page to place the controller
into Rain Shutdown.
Irrigation programs should be set to the Yes
option for any watering configuration.
Press the Down Arrow to display the Irrigation
Program option screen, and select the appropriate
option.
P # IRRIGATION PROGRAM: YES
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 20: Irrigation Program
Step 6
Omit By Date Enable
OMIT BY DATE allows you to enter up to 15 dates,
on which watering will NOT occur. The steps
required to add/delete dates are detailed in the Omit
By Date section. The Omit By Date option
determines whether or not a program will run for the
omitted dates entered into the controller.
Page 44
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
There are two options:
•
ON - Enables omitting by date (Program will not
start on any omitted date).
•
OFF- Disables omitting by date (Program start
will not be affected by Omit By Date entries).
Press the Down Arrow to display the Omit By Date
Enable option screen.
Press F1=CHANGE OPTION to select the
appropriate option.
P # OMIT BY DATE ENABLE OPTION: OFF
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 21: Omit By Date Option
Step 7
Station Delay Time
Use STATION DELAY TIME to specify "dead" time
between stations being controlled by a program. For
example, assume a program controls three stations
and there is a station delay time of 10 seconds. After
station 1 has completed its watering, the controller
will wait 10 seconds before turning on station 2.
When station 2 completes, the controller will delay
another 10 seconds before starting station 3.
The available delay is 0 to 255 seconds.
Press the Down Arrow key to display the Station
Delay Time screen.
P # CYCLE MODE: START TIMES
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 22: Station Delay Time Display
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 45
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Enter the Station Delay Time.
Step 8
Time Format
The time format for station run times can be
established on a per program basis.
There are two options, HH:MM (hours and minutes)
and MM:SS (minutes and seconds).
The MM:SS option allows precise station run time
control, since the station can be programmed to the
second.
Press the Down Arrow key to display the Time
Format screen.
Select the Time Format using the F1=CHANGE
OPTION toggle key.
P # TIME FORMAT OPTION: HH:MM
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 23: Time Format
Step 9
At Water Limit
There are two options.
Page 46
•
Select GIVE WARNING to continue watering
when the monthly water limit is reached. If the
limit is exceeded, an entry is made in the
Warning/Report list and irrigation continues (see
Chapter 10).
•
Select STOP WATERING to cease watering
when the monthly water limit is reached. If the
limit is exceeded, an entry is made in the
Warning/Report list and irrigation is stopped
(see Chapter 10). No further irrigation occurs
until a new month begins (and the monthly
water total is reset).
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Press the Down Arrow key to display the At Water
Limit screen.
Select either Stop Watering or Give Warning using
the F1=CHANGE OPTION toggle key.
P # AT WATER LIMIT: STOP WATERING
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 24: At Water Limit
Step 10
Master Valve
There are four options:
•
MV1 (Master Valve 1)
•
MV2 (Master Valve 2)
•
Normally Open MV
•
None
Press the Down Arrow key to display the Master
Valve selection screen.
P # MASTER VALVE USED: MV1
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 25: Master Valve Selection
Advance through the four selections using the
F1=CHANGE OPTION key and select the
appropriate Master Valve configuration.
Note:
If the NONE option is selected for Master Valve, no
further Master Valve/Pump options will follow.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 47
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
Step 11
DX2 User Manual
If a Normally Open Master Valve is selected, it will
not be activated with the program. It will be
energized only if the controller detects a main line
or unscheduled overflow condition. In this
condition, 24 VAC appears at the N.O. terminal
board output, which turns the valve off.
Pump
There are two options:
•
Select Pump if the program is to operate with a
pump.
•
Select No Pump if the program is to operate
without a pump.
Press the Down Arrow key to display the Pump
selection screen.
Select the Pump configuration using the
F1=CHANGE OPTION toggle key.
P # USES NO PUMP
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 26: Pump Selection
Step 12
Master Valve On Between Stations
There are two options, ON and OFF.
Select the appropriate configuration.
MASTER VALVE IS ON BETWEEN STATIONS
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|¾||½|
Figure 27: Valve On/Off Between Stations
Page 48
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 13
DX2 User Manual
Master Valve Delay Turn On Time
Use MASTER VALVE DELAY TURN ON TIME
to delay the activation of the master valve by 0 to
600 seconds from the program starts time (one time
delay).
Press the Down Arrow key to display the Master
Valve Delay Turn On Time entry screen.
Enter the delay time then press ENTER. The time
must be between 0 and 600 seconds.
MASTER VALVE DELAY TURN ON TIME: 30
ENTER TIME (0-600 SEC)
|¾||½|
Figure 28: Valve Delay Turn On Time
To end the Program Setup procedure, press the
Down Arrow to return to the Setup Main Menu.
To make changes or to configure another program
number, press F1=PROGRAM and repeat Setup
Program procedure. Advance through all menu
screens using the Down Arrow.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 49
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
ISC (Individual Station Control)
ISC is used to specify operational settings for the Individual
Station Control (ISC) programs used by the Evolution DX2.
The ISC setup options are given below. The options are
identical to those given in the previous section, Setup Programs.
Refer to the Setup Programs section for details on the ISC
options.
•
Cycle Mode
•
Overlap Protection
•
Rain Shutdown
•
Omit By Date
•
Time Format
•
Water Limit Checking
•
Master Valve
•
Pump
•
Master Valve Delay Turn on Time
Page 50
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Station Number Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the ISC program number entry screen
through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F2=ISC
ISC NUMBER: ISC__
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION (1-48)
|¾||½|
Figure 29: ISC Program Number
Step 2
Enter the station number then press ENTER. The
station number must be between 1 and 48.
Note:
Step 3
The maximum number of stations is determined by
the total stations installed in the controller. The
maximum number will appear on the Station
Number Entry Display screen.
The ISC Options are identical to the Setup Program
options. Refer to the Setup Program procedure to
complete all ISC options.
This completes the ISC procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 51
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F5 Setup
F3
Stations
Stations
Setup Stations is used to enable/disable flow and current limit
checking and to specify operational controls for the programs
used by Evolution DX2.
Flow checking is used to determine if a pipe has failed (broken,
clogged) or if the monthly watering limit (budget) has been
exceeded. Current checking is used to determine if there is a
short or break in field wiring or if an out-of-tolerance or
marginal field wiring problem exists. See Appendix A for
complete details on flow limit checking and Appendix B for
details on current limit checking. The following station options
are:
•
Limit Checking - Enables or disables upper and
lower limits of both Water Flow
and Current.
•
Limits/Type -
Enter upper and lower limits of
Flow and Current. Select Type as
Normal or Injector. Injector type
is defined as a fertilizer
application station.
•
Auto Limits -
Establishes upper and lower limits
of Flow and Current by measuring
each station. An upper and lower
percentage of the measurements
Page 52
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
are calculated to automatically set
the limits for each station.
Stations Setup
Enable/Disable Limit Checking Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Limits Option Menu through the
following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F2=ISC
Flow and Current Limit Checking is enabled or
disabled with this option.
|F1|=ENABLE/DISABLE LIMIT CHECKING
|F2|=LIMITS/TYPE |F3|=AUTO LIMITS |½|
Figure 30: Station Limits Options
Step 2
Select F1=Enable/Disable Limit Checking.
|F1|=FLOW
|F2|=CURRENT
|½|
Figure 31: Flow/Current Selection
There are two options:
•
Select FLOW to enable or disable water flow
limit checking.
•
Select CURRENT to enable or disable electrical
current limit checking.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 53
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 3
DX2 User Manual
Select F1=FLOW.
There are two options:
Step 4
•
Select UPPER LIMIT to enable or disable Upper
Limit Flow Checking.
•
Select LOWER LIMIT to enable or disable
Lower Limit Flow Checking.
Select F1=UPPER LIMIT.
UPPER LIMIT CHECK: ENABLED
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|½|
Figure 32: Upper Limit Check
There are two options:
•
ENABLED
•
DISABLED
Step 5
Change the option displayed using the
F1=CHANGE OPTION toggle key.
Step 6
Press the Up Arrow key to return to the Limit
Selection screen and select F2=LOWER LIMIT.
LOWER LIMIT CHECK: ENABLED
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|½|
Figure 33: Lower Limit Check
There are two options:
Page 54
•
ENABLED
•
DISABLED
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 7
DX2 User Manual
Change the option displayed using the
F1=CHANGE OPTION toggle key.
If Electrical Current (enable/disable options) requires
modification, use the Up Arrow key to select the previous
screen.
Repeat the Limit Checking procedure for Current Limits options
by selecting Current rather than Flow.
At the end of Limit Checking procedure, press the QUIT key to
return to the base screen.
Limits/Type Procedure
This procedure applies to either the Station Number outputs or
the Master Valve/Pump outputs. Either parameter may be
configured at any time independently of each other.
The Station/Master Valve Number Entry screen is a dual purpose
menu which accepts two separate entries. The Station Number
output is selected by entering any number between 1 and 48
(maximum number is limited by the number of stations
installed).
The Master Valve/Pump output configuration is selected by any
number between 1 and 4 which is preceded by a 0 (zero). The
Master Valve/Pump selections are:
•
MV1=01
•
MV2=02
•
N.O.=03
•
Pump=04
Note:
Entries from 05 to 09 will be accepted as station
number outputs.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 55
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 1
DX2 User Manual
Advance to the Station Number/Master Valve Entry
screen through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
F2=Limits/Type
STATION NUMBER:
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-48, OX=MV)
|½|
Figure 34: Limits/Type
Note:
Step 2
Enter the station number then press ENTER. The
Number must be between 1 and 48.
Note:
Step 3
Page 56
The Station Numbers relate to the individual station
outputs whereas the Master Valve selection relates
to the complete irrigation system configuration.
These entries should be considered as two
independent parameters.
The maximum number of stations is determined by
the total stations installed in the associated satellite
controller. The maximum number will appear on
the Station Number Entry Display screen.
Select F1=CURRENT LIMIT from the three options
in the following display:
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
|F1|=CURRENT LIMIT |F2|=FLOW LIMIT
|F3|=TYPE
|½|
Figure 35: Limit Options
The three options are:
Step 4
•
CURRENT LIMIT - Set up limits for
electrical current checking.
•
FLOW LIMIT- Set up limits for flow
checking.
•
TYPE - Select station type (NORMAL, or
INJECTOR).
Enter the maximum current limit for the station. The
limit must be between 0.0 and 1.0 amp, and then
press ENTER.
`
STATION ## MAX CURRENT LIMIT: 1.00
ENTER LIMIT (0.0-1.0 AMPS)
|½|
Figure 36: Max Current Limit
Step 5
Enter the minimum current limit for the station in
the Minimum Current display screen. The limit
must be between 0.0 and 1.0 amp, and then press
enter.
Note:
A nominal value of 0.05 amps of quiescent current
is recommended for the Minimum Current entry to
ensure that an open output circuit would be
detected.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 57
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
STATION ## MIN CURRENT LIMIT: .05
ENTER LIMIT (0.0-1.0 AMPS)
|½|
Figure 37: Min Current Limit
Controller returns to the limit options display.
Step 6
Select F2=FLOW LIMIT from the three option
menu.
Enter the maximum flow limit for the station. The
limit must be between 0 and 2000 gallons per minute
(GPM). Press ENTER.
Controller returns to the Limit Options display
STATION ## MAX FLOW LIMIT: 500
ENTER MAX LIMIT (0-2000)
|½|
Figure 38: Max Flow Limit
Step 7
Enter the minimum flow limit for the station. The
limit must be between 0 and 2000 gallons per minute
(GPM), then press ENTER.
STATION ## MIN FLOW LIMIT:
ENTER MIN LIMIT (0-2000)
Figure 39: Min Flow Limit
Controller returns to the Limit Options display.
Page 58
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 8
DX2 User Manual
Select F3=TYPE. The present setting for the station
is displayed.
STATION # TYPE: NORMAL
|F1|=NORMAL |F2|=INJECTOR
|½|
Figure 40: Station Type
There are two options:
Step 9
•
NORMAL
•
INJECTOR
Select F1=NORMAL to change station type to
Normal.
Select F2=INJECTOR to change station type to
Injector.
Step 10
Press the Up Arrow to return to the Station/Master
Valve Number menu. Repeat as necessary.
End of Limits/Type procedure.
Press QUIT to return to the base screen.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 59
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
DX2 User Manual
Injector Station Operation
The typical use of an injector station is to apply
fertilizer to wet ground.
When the user includes an injector assigned station
in one or more programs, the controller will prompt
for an injector delay time. The operation of a
program using the injector delay time is best
described with an example.
Assume Program 1 uses injector station 10 with a
programmed injector delay = 1 minute. Also
assume program 1 has three NORMAL stations (1,
2, 3) each with a run time of 5 minutes.
Example: Injector station operation with a program start time of
7:00 A.M.
7:00 AM
Master Valve
ON
Station 1
ON
7:01
Station 10
ON
7:05
Station 1
OFF
Station 2
ON
Station 2
OFF
Station 3
ON
All Stations and MV
OFF
7:10
7:15
Page 60
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Main Flow Procedure
This procedure establishes the maximum flow limit for the
complete controller irrigation system. The accepted flow limit
range is 0-2000 gallons per minute (GPM). The GPM value is
determined by the user by calculating the expected amount of
water usage at any given time in the watering configuration. A
safety margin of 20% above the determined value is
recommended.
Calculation Example:
For an irrigation system that delivers a maximum flow of
1000 GPM at any given time throughout the complete
watering program, the Main Flow Limit would be 1200
GPM. (1000 + 20%) = (1000+(1000x.20=200) = 1200)
Flow Max Main Line Limits
In a Flow Max system, the total GPM of all participating
controllers is calculated into the overall Main Flow Limit value.
The Main Flow Limit is entered at the submaster controller only.
For any number of controllers within a Flow Max group, there
will only be one main flow limit. Remember that the main flow
limit must be higher than an expected flow under normal
operation yet low enough to react when a main break occurs.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 61
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Station Number/Master Valve Entry
screen through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
F2=Limits/Type
STATION NUMBER:
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-48, OX=MV)
|½|
Figure 41: Main Flow Limit Entry
Step 2
Enter 01 (zero 1) then press ENTER. The main limit
option menu is depicted in Figure 4-26:
|F1|=CURRENT LIMIT |F2|=FLOW LIMIT
|½|
Figure 42: Main Limit Options
Step 3
Select F2=FLOW LIMIT. The maximum main flow
limit is displayed (the default value is 2000 GPM).
MAIN FLOW MAX FLOW LIMIT: 2000
ENTER MAX LIMIT (0-2000)
|½|
Figure 43: Main Flow Maximum Limit
Step 4
Enter the determined value for your system and then
press the ENTER key. Press QUIT to return to the
base screen.
This completes the Main Flow Limit procedure.
Page 62
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Auto Limits Procedure
The Auto Limits feature establishes upper and lower limits of
Flow and Current by constantly measuring each station. An
upper and lower percentage of the measurements are calculated
to automatically set the limits for each station.
The current upper default percentage is set at 20% above the
measured value (If the measured value is .50 Amps, the
calculated value for the upper limit would be .60 Amps). The
lower default percentage is set at 50% below the measured value
(If the measured value is .50 Amps, the calculated value for the
lower limit would be .25 Amps).
The default values may be changed at any time using the
F2=SET LIMIT (%) option. The percentage value ranges are
given on the percentage entry display screen.
Note:
Step 1
If the default values are not suitable for your
application, the SET LIMITS percentages must be
entered prior to running the Auto Limits. Select
F2=SET LIMIT and set your percentages
accordingly.
Advance to the Limits/Type menu Auto Limits two
options are displayed through the following key
sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
F2=Limits/Type
|F1|=RUN AUTO LIMITS |F2|=SET LIMIT (%)
|½|
Figure 44: Auto Limits
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 63
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 2
DX2 User Manual
Select F1=RUN AUTO LIMITS and verify the
following three option display:
|F1|=FLOW ONLY |F2|=CURRENT ONLY
|F3|=BOTH FLOW AND CURRENT
|½|
Figure 45: Auto Limits
There are three options:
Step 3
•
Flow Only
•
Current Only
•
Both Flow and Current
Select F1=Flow Only and enter the station number.
The station number must be between 1 and 48. To
measure all stations, enter station number 1, and then
press ENTER.
Note:
The maximum number of stations is determined by
the total stations installed in the controller. The
maximum number (1-xx) will appear on the Station
Number Entry Display.
Each station will run for the full time period of the
flow check delay time (1 to 6 minutes) before
proceeding to the next station.
The following display, as depicted in Figure 4-30,
indicates the station number, run time count-down
timer, station current measurement (I) and flow
measurement (GPM). The upper and lower limits of
flow are automatically calculated based on these
measured parameters.
Page 64
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
When the count-down timer is zero, the station
number will increment to the next station and the
measurement process is repeated. When all stations
are complete, the display returns to the three option
selection screen. At this point, all upper and lower
percentage values have been calculated.
Note: The default measuring time for each station is two
minutes. This time period accounts for the Flow
Delay time allowing water flow pressure to stabilize.
AUTO LIM STA 1
0:02:00 I=0.00 GPM=0
|½|
Figure 46: Auto Limits
Step 4
Select F2=CURRENT ONLY and enter the station
number. The station number must be between 1- 48.
To measure all stations, enter station number 1, and
then press ENTER.
The Current measuring default time is 5 seconds for
each station. The calculating program is identical to
the Flow mode. In addition to sequencing through all
stations, MV1, MV2 and the N.O. output currents
are also established.
Note:
The pump is not calculated and therefore should be
established by the user manually.
When completed, the Auto Limits Options menu
will be displayed.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 65
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 5
DX2 User Manual
Repeat procedure selecting F3=BOTH FLOW AND
CURRENT.
This selection is identical to the previous steps with
the Current measurements taking place on the first
pass through the stations and the Flow
measurements are taken on the second pass.
When the flow measurement pass is completed, the
Auto Limits Options will be displayed.
This completes the Auto Limits procedure.
Press QUIT key to return to the base screen.
Page 66
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F5 Setup
F4
Controller
Setup Controller
Setup Controller is used to specify operational controls for the
controller. The following options are available in the Controller
Setup:
•
FLOW OPTIONS - Set monthly limits, select
meters for flow checking, specify
the amount of time to delay
before checking limits, and set
unscheduled flow limits. See
Appendix A for complete details
on flow meter operation.
•
OMIT BY DATE - Select up to 15 dates, on which
watering will not occur.
•
USER OPTIONS - Change the time and date, select
the language for the display, and
enter or change access codes
(passwords) for using the
controller. See Appendix E for
additional details on access
codes.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 67
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
•
DX2 User Manual
CONFIGURATION - Specify communications
mode of the satellite, submaster
or the Flow Max group.
Flow Options Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Controller Flow Options menu
through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
|F1|=FLOW OPTIONS |F2|=OMIT BY DATE
|F3|=USER OPTIONS |F4|=CONFIGURATION|½|
Figure 47: Controller Options
Step 2
Select F1=Flow Options to display the following
Limit options:
|F1|=MONTHLY LIMIT |F2|=COMPARE LIMITS
|F3|=DELAY LIMIT
|F4|=UNSCHED LIMIT |½|
Figure 48: Limit Options
Four options are displayed:
Page 68
•
MONTHLY LIMIT
•
COMPARE LIMITS
•
DELAY LIMIT
•
UNSCHED LIMIT
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 3
DX2 User Manual
To change monthly water limit, select
F1=MONTHLY LIMIT.
The current monthly water limit of the controller is
displayed.
CONTROLLER MONTHLY WATER LIMIT: NONE
ENTER LIMIT (1-9999999) F1=NONE
|½|
Figure 49: Monthly Water Limit
Note:
Step 4
If the monthly watering limit is reached, the
controller can be programmed to either:
1. Give Warning
2. Stop Watering
See "At Water Limit"
Enter the limit, or press F1=NONE to enter no limit.
The limit must be between 1 and 9999999.
Note:
Water units are specified in gallons.
Press the Up Arrow to return to the Limit Options
screen.
Step 5
Flow Meter Compare Limit Selection
Select F2=COMPARE LIMITS. The flow meter
currently being used is displayed.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 69
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FLOW METER USED: FLOW #1
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|½|
Figure 50: Flow Meter Selection
There are three options:
Step 6
•
FLOW METER #1- Station flow rate limit
checking will use data provided by FLOW
METER #1. Accumulated water totals by
FLOW METER #1 are used for comparison to
the Monthly Water Limit specified in the
previous step.
•
FLOW METER #2 - Operation is identical to
Flow Meter #1. Accumulated water totals by
FLOW METER #2 are compared to the
specified Monthly Water Limit.
•
SUM OF FLOW #1 + FLOW #2 - Selecting
sum of both meters indicates that the controller
will take the accumulation total of FLOW
METER #1 and add it to the accumulation total
of FLOW METER #2. The result will be
compared to the Monthly Water Limit.
Additionally, station flow rates (measured in
GPM) will also be summed and compared.
Select the appropriate option using the
F1=CHANGE OPTION key.
Press the Up Arrow key to return to the Limit
Options display.
Page 70
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 7
DX2 User Manual
Delay Limit
The Delay Limit sets a delay time (in minutes) prior
to taking measurements to allow for stabilization of
water lines.
Select F3=DELAY LIMIT from the Limit Options
display.
DELAY TIME: 3
ENTER TIME (1-6 MIN)
|½|
Figure 51: Delay Limit Time
Step 8
Enter the delay time. The delay must be a value
between 1 and 6 minutes. Press ENTER to return to
Limit Options screen.
Step 9
Unscheduled Limit
The Unsched Limit option sets the maximum
unscheduled water flow which can occur before an
alarm or shut-down occurs.
Select F4=UNSCHED LIMIT to display the
following screen:
UNSCHED FLOW LIMIT: 300
ENTER LIMIT (0-2000)
|½|
Figure 52: Unsched Flow Limit
Step 10
Enter the Unscheduled Limit value. The limit must
be between 0 and 2000 gallons then press ENTER.
This completes the Flow Options procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to base menu.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 71
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Omit By Date Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Controller Omit By Date Options
menu through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F2=Omit By Date
OMISSION DATES (MONTH/DAY): NONE
|F1|=DELETE |F2|=ADD
|¾||½|
Figure 53: Omission Dates
The date entered last is displayed. All prior dates may be viewed
by pressing the Down Arrow key.
Step 2
Deleting dates
Using the arrow keys to display the date to be
deleted, then press the F1=DELETE key. Repeat
procedure as necessary.
Step 3
Adding Dates
Press the F2=ADD key. Enter the number of the
month. Use 1 for January, 2 for February, etc., and
then press ENTER.
MONTH: 5
ENTER MONTH (1-12)
Figure 54: Month Entry
Page 72
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 4
DX2 User Manual
Enter the day of the month. The day must be
between 1 and 31, and then press ENTER.
DAY OF THE MONTH: 15
ENTER DAY OF THE MONTH (1-31)
Figure 55: Day of the Month
Step 5
Repeat the F2=ADD DATE sequence to add
additional dates, up to 15 dates may be entered.
Step 6
To review entered dates, use the Up Arrow key.
This completes the Omit By Date procedure.
Press QUIT to return to base screen.
User Options Procedure
The three available User Options are:
•
Time/Date
•
Language
•
Access Code
Step 1
Advance to the User Options menu through the
following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F3=User Options
|F1|=TIME/DATE |F2|=LANGUAGE
|F3|=ACCESS CODE
|½|
Figure 56: User Options
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 73
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 2
DX2 User Manual
Time/Date
Select F1=TIME/DATE to display the two following
options:
•
12 HOUR display
•
24 HOUR display
| F1 | =12 HOUR (AM/PM) TIME DISPLAY
| F2 | =24 HOUR TIME DISPLAY
|½|
Figure 57: Time Format
Step 3
Press F1 to select 12 Hour (AM/PM) Time Display,
or F2 to select 24 hour time display.
Step 4
Enter the current time in hours and minutes.
If 12 hour format was selected, press the
F1=AM/PM toggle key to select AM or PM.
If you selected 24 hour format, 1 PM is 13:00, 2 PM
is 14:00, etc.
TIME:
: _ AM
ENTER TIME (HH:MM) |F1| =AM/PM |½|
Figure 58: Time Entry Format
Step 5
Press ENTER to advance to the Year Entry screen.
Enter the year. Four digits must be entered
YEAR:
ENTER YEAR (YYYY)
Page 74
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Figure 59: Year Entry Format
Step 6
Press ENTER to advance to the Month Entry screen.
Enter the month. Use 1 for January, 2 for February,
etc.
MONTH:
ENTER MONTH (1-12)
|½|
Figure 60: Month Entry Format
Step 7
Press ENTER to advance to the Day of the Month
Entry screen.
Enter the day of the month. The day must be
between 1 and 31.
DAY OF THE MONTH:
ENTER DAY OF THE MONTH (1 – 31)
|½|
Figure 61: Date of the Month Entry
Step 8
Press ENTER to display the two Date Format
options.
|F1|=MONTH / DAY / YEAR DISPLAY
|F2|=DAY / MONTH / YEAR DISPLAY
|½|
Figure 62: Date Format Options
Step 9
Press F1 to select Month/Day/Year display, or press
F2 to select Day/Month/Year display.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 75
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
|F1|=MONTH / DAY / YEAR DISPLAY
|F2|=DAY / MONTH / YEAR DISPLAY
|½|
Figure 63: Date Format Options
The selection advances the display to the Day Entry
screen.
Step 10
Enter the present day of the week using keypad
numbers 1 through 7 (SUN-SAT).
DAY:
ENTER DAY OF THE WEEK |SUN| - |SAT|
|½|
Figure 64: Day of Week Entry Format
Pressing ENTER returns to the User Options
display.
Step 11
Language
Select F2=LANGUAGE to display the two
following options:
•
English - Displays all menus in English
•
Espanol - Displays all menus in Spanish
|F1|=TIME/DATE | F2 | =LANGUAGE
|F3|=ACCESS CODE
|½|
Figure 65: User Options
Page 76
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Step 12
Select the appropriate Language option. Either
selection will return screen to the menu options.
Step 13
Access Code
Select F3=ACCESS CODE.
Access Codes are used to restrict unauthorized
access to the controller’s sensitive program data.
Please refer to Appendix D for additional details on
setting and using an access code.
ACCESS CODE:
ENTER ACCESS CODE
|½|
Figure 66: Access Code
Step 14
Enter the new access code. The access code must be
three digits (numbers).
Note:
The first time an access code is entered, any three
digits may be used. Thereafter, the access code you
enter is checked against the code stored in the
controller. The code you enter must match the
stored code, or access is denied to certain menu
options, as shown in the table in Appendix D.
Caution: Do not forget your access code.
Step 15
Access Enable/Disable
If the access code is correct, it is accepted and three
options are displayed.
|F1|=ENABLE/DISABLE ACCESS
|F2|=CHANGE LEVEL |F3|=CHANGE CODE |½|
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 77
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Figure 67: Access Code
Step 16
•
Use ENABLE/DISABLE ACCESS to turn on
and off the use of the access code feature.
•
Use CHANGE LEVEL to change the access
code level.
•
Use CHANGE CODE to enter a new access
code.
Select F1=Enable/Disable Access.
|F1|=RESTRICT ACCESS
|F2|=NO RESTRICTIONS
|½|
Figure 68: Access Restriction
There are two options:
•
Select RESTRICT ACCESS by using the access
code to control use of the controller.
•
Select NO RESTRICTIONS to not use the
access code.
Step 17
Press F1 to select RESTRICT ACCESS or press F2
to select NO RESTRICTIONS.
The previous menu is then displayed.
Step 18
Access Code Level
Select F2=CHANGE LEVEL to advance to the
Select Level screen.
Page 78
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
SELECT ACCESS LEVEL
|F1|=LEVEL 1 |F2|=LEVEL 2
|½|
Figure 69: Select Access Level
There are two options:
•
LEVEL 1
•
LEVEL 2
Step 19
Press F1 to select Level 1 or press F2 to select
Level 2. The previous menu is then displayed.
Step 20
Access Code
Select F3=CHANGE CODE and enter the new
access
code. The code must be three digits.
ACCESS CODE:
ENTER ACCESS CODE
|½|
Figure 70: Select Access Level
Step 21
Press the Up Arrow to return to the previous menu.
Repeat as necessary.
This completes the User Options procedure.
Press QUIT key to return to base menu.
Configuration Procedure
The Configuration Options allow a controller to be set up to
operate as a submaster or satellite and with or without Flow
Max, in a Central Control System.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 79
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
For Flow Max operation, refer to Flow Max Appendix E. This
appendix describes Flow Max in detail with full procedures on
setting up a Flow Max system.
Step 1
Advance to the Configuration Options menu through
the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
|F1|=ACTS AS SATELLITE
|F2|=ACTS AS SUBMASTER |F3|=FLOW MAX|½|
Figure 71: Configuration Options
There are three options:
•
Select F1=ACTS AS SATELLITE if:
The controller operates in stand-alone mode or
the controller operates in Central Control Mode,
but is not a submaster.
•
Page 80
Select F2=ACTS AS SUBMASTER if:
o
The controller is to operate as a submaster
(A submaster controller has direct
communications with a Rain Master Central
Control System via radio, telephone or
direct wiring).
o
A submaster is also required in a selfcontained Flow Max configuration
performing as the management controller
over the system.
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
•
DX2 User Manual
Select F3=FLOW MAX if:
This controller is part of a Flow Max setup.
See Appendix F for full details on Flow Max.
Note:
Step 2
These option configurations will be required on all
controllers in a Flow Max system. The controllers
must be assigned as satellites with the first
controller as the submaster. Participating units will
need to be set up for sharing the flow sensor, master
valve or pump.
Select F1=ACTS AS SATELLITE. When selected,
the base screen is displayed.
The controller is now assigned as a satellite.
Step 3
From the Configuration Options menu, select
F2= ACT AS SUBMASTER. The following
communication screen is displayed:
SUBMASTER COMMUNICATIONS TYPE: RF / WIRE
|F1|=RADIO/WIRE|F2|=PHONE |F3|=TRUNK |½|
Figure 72: Submaster Communication
There are three options:
• Radio Wire
• Phone
• Trunk
Select the appropriate communication option, for
your system.
Step 4
Enter the submaster address in the following screen:
ADDRESS: ##
ENTER ADDRESS (0-255)
Figure 73: Submaster Address
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 81
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
If the submaster is hardwired to one or more
satellites, these satellites will be automatically
assigned addresses immediately after connecting to
the hardwire link.
Step 5
From the Configuration Options menu, select
F3= FLOW MAX. The following Flow, Pump and
Master Valve selection screen is displayed:
|F1|=SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
|F3|=NORMAL MODE
NOW =F3
|½|
Figure 74: Shared Devices
There are two options:
• Share Flow, Pump, and MV
• Normal Mode
If no devices are shared, select F3=NORMAL
MODE.
In a Flow Max system, shared devices must be
selected in the Submaster and all participating
controllers.
Refer to Flow Max Appendix E for full
configuration procedures.
This completes the Configuration procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base screen.
Page 82
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F5 Setup
F5
Sensors
Sensors
Setup Sensors is used to prepare the controller for use of flow
sensors. See Appendix A for details on flow sensors.
Moisture Procedure
Step 1
Proceed to the Sensor Option Selection menu as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F5=Sensors
|F1|=MOISTURE |F2|=FLOW
|½|
Figure 75: Sensor Options
Step 2
Select F1=MOISTURE to display the following
options:
|F1|=REVIEW M SENSORS |F2|=SETUP ALL MS
|F3|=SETUP ONE MS |F4|=ENABLE/DIS MS |½|
Figure 76: Sensors Setup
Note: Moisture sensors are no longer supported by the
Evolution DX2 Controller.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 83
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Procedure
Step 1
Proceed to the Sensor Option Selection menu as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F5=Sensors
|F1|=MOISTURE |F2|=FLOW
|½|
Figure 77: Sensor Options
Step 2
Select F2=FLOW. The following menu is
displayed:
|F1|=FLOW METER 1
|F2|=FLOW METER 2
|½|
Figure 78: Flow Meter Selection
There are two options:
Step 3
•
FLOW METER 1
•
FLOW METER 2
Select F1=FLOW METER 1.
There are two options:
Page 84
•
SET K VALUE
•
SET OFFSET VALUE
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The K and offset values provide the calibration data
required for the controller to compensate for supply line
pipe size and flow meter used. Use SET K VALUE to
enter the K value.
Refer to Appendix A to select the proper K value for
your installation. Use SET OFFSET VALUE to enter
the OFFSET value. Refer to Appendix A to select the
proper OFFSET value for your installation.
Step 4
Select F1=SET K VALUE. The current K Value is
displayed.
FLOW 1 K VALUE: 1000
ENTER K VALUE (0-56000)
|½|
Figure 79: K Value Entry
Step 5
Enter the K Value. The value must be between 0
and 56000. Press ENTER.
Step 6
Select F2=SET OFFSET VALUE. The current
Offset Value is displayed.
FLOW 1 OFFSET VALUE: 1000
ENTER OFFSET VALUE (0-26000)
|½|
Figure 80: Offset Value Entry
Step 7
Enter the Offset Value. The value must be between
0 and 26000. Press ENTER.
Step 8
Press the Up Arrow to return to the Flow Meter
selection screen. Select F2=FLOW METER 2.
Repeat the procedure as described for Flow Meter 2.
Chapter 4: Setup
Page 85
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
DX2 User Manual
Weather Center installation requires that the K and
Offset values be set to zero (default values) on Flow
Meter 2. K=0, Offset=0
This completes the Flow procedure.
Press QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 86
Chapter 4: Setup
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 5
Program Entry
The Evolution DX2 controller allows the user to enter program
data for up to 12 individual programs. A program provides a way
of grouping stations with similar irrigation characteristics so that
the start/stop of irrigation cycles can be automatically controlled.
All programs must contain the following basic information:
The station number(s) associated with the program
The time(s) during the day when the program is executed
(start time)
The days of the week when the program is to be executed
(water days)
The amount of time each station remains on
(station run time)
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Program Entry
Operation of a program may be altered
depending upon the setup options selected.
Refer to Chapter 4: Setup for additional details.
Chapter 5:
Warning:
Page 89
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Example of Program Execution
The following example demonstrates the actions which occur
when a program runs. This program uses the factory default
setup options defined in Chapter 4, Table 1 and a 14 day (two
week) cycle.
Assume that Program 1 contains the following information:
Table 2: Program 1 Watering Schedule
WATER DAYS
SUN
Week 1
Week 2
MON
TUE
X
X
WED
THU
FRI
X
X
SAT
X
X
X
START TIMES
Start Time 1
1:00 AM
Start Time 2
4:00 AM
RUN TIMES
Page 90
Station 1
10 min
Station 2
15 min
Station 3
20 min
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Assume the current date/time is Monday 1:00 AM of Week 1.
Execution of program 1 begins.
PGM 1 STATION 1 ON
|F1|=MAIN MENU
00:01:30 MV=ON
|F3|=NEXT
Figure 81: Program 1
The F1=MAIN MENU option allows the user to go to the main
menu while the program continues to run. The F3=NEXT option
advances the station number to the next station in the program.
Upon program completion for the 1:00 AM start time, the
following events would have occurred:
1:00 AM
1:10 AM
1:25 AM
1:45 AM
Master Valve On
Station 1 OFF
Station 2 OFF
Station 3 OFF
Station 1 ON
Station 2 ON
Station 3 ON
Master Valve Off
At 4:00 AM the program would repeat itself in an identical
fashion.
On Wednesday of Week 1, the irrigation cycle would repeat,
same as Monday. Program execution would occur on the Week
1 and Week 2 specified days. The net effect of program 1 would
be to irrigate every other day, and two times each scheduled
water day, forever.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 91
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F1 Program
F1
Modify Program
Modify Program
Overview
Modify Program is used to alter a program stored in the
Evolution DX2. The following five options are available for
modification; and depicted in Figure 5-2.
PROGRAM START: Specifies start time for the program.
WATER DAYS:
Specifies the days to water.
STATIONS:
Selects irrigation stations and the
corresponding runtimes of that station.
PERCENT:
Changes the percentage (0% to 999%)
of run time in a program (increase or
decrease base run time).
SEND:
Transmits program modifications to the
Central Control System. See Chapter 9
(Central Control Mode) for additional
details.
P1 |F1|=PROGRAM START |F2|=WATER DAYS
|F3|=STATIONS|F4|=PERCENT |F5|=SEND |½|
Figure 82: Modify Program
Page 92
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Program Start Time Procedure
Overview
Start Time is defined as the precise time of day that a given
program starts its watering routine.
The Program Start Time feature provides the ability to set up as
many as 8 start times for each of the 12 available programs.
Note:
A program number must be entered to advance to
the Program Start Menu.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the START TIME menu through the
following key sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F1=Program Start
P# START TIME 1:
:____AM
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
F1=AM/PM
|¾||½|
Figure 83: Start Time Entry
Step 2
Enter the first start time in the START TIME 1
Entry display, and then press ENTER after each time
entry.
Enter start times in 12 hour or 24 hour format.
If 12 hour format is selected, use the F1=AM/PM
toggle key to select AM or PM.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 93
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
Step 3
DX2 User Manual
To use Continuous Cycle rather than Start Times,
go to Setup Programs, Cycle Mode.
Refer to Chapter 4: Setup.
With the first start time entered, the display will
advance to the Start Time 2 display. Enter the
second start time, if required.
Repeat as necessary to enter up to eight start times,
or press the down arrow key to advance through the
remaining start time menus.
Upon completion, the Modify Program Option menu
will be displayed.
This completes the Program Start Time Procedure.
Page 94
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Watering Day Options
The Water Day options screen offers three modes of watering
routines to accommodate virtually any configuration of irrigation
watering systems.
The three available options are:
14 DAY CYCLE - Creates a program utilizing a two
week water cycle.
SKIP BY DAY -
Selects a number of days between
watering.
31 DAY CYCLE - Creates a program utilizing a one
month water cycle.
Water Days Procedure (14 Day Cycle)
Overview
The F1=14 DAY CYCLE option provides the ability to select the
watering days for a two week period. When programmed, the 14
Day Cycle will water as specified for two weeks and will
continue to do so in the same manner in all subsequent 2 week
periods. The water days will remain consistent indefinitely until
the program is changed.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 95
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the F1=14 DAY CYCLE selection menu
through the following key sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F2=Water Days
P1 |F1|=14 DAY CYCLE
|F3|=31 DAY CYCLE
|F2|=SKIP BY DAY
NOW=F1
|½|
Figure 84: Water Days Options
Note:
Step 2
NOW=F1 indicates the currently selected option.
Select F1=14 DAY CYCLE to display the following
Week 1 Entry screen, as depicted in Figure 5-5.
The first line of the display indicates: the program
number (P#), the week 1 water days which have
been programmed, the current day (TODAY:), and
the current week (either WK1 or WK2).
The current week display located in the upper right
corner indicates the status of the 14-DAY CYCLE.
If WK1 is displayed, WK2 will not appear until
week 2 starts. Each new week starts on Sunday
12:00 AM. This feature easily identifies the week in
which the program is currently running at any given
time.
P# : NONE
TODAY: MO WK1
ENTER WEEK 1 WATER DAYS|SUN|- |SAT||¾||½|
Figure 85: Week 1 Entry
Page 96
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Use the Day Pad keys and the Enter key to select the
days of the week.
Example: Select Sunday and Monday as water
days, press the SUN key followed by the
MON key and then press the Enter key.
SU and MO appear in the display.
To delete a day, press the day key and
verify that it blinks, and then press
ENTER, the water day is removed.
Step 3
Enter the water days for Week one. The entries will
blink on and off until the ENTER key is pressed.
Step 4
When complete: press the Down Arrow key to
advance to Week 2.
Enter the desired water days for Week 2, and then
press the Down Arrow key to return to the Modify
Program option display menu.
This completes the 14 DAY WATER CYCLE
Procedure.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 97
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Water Days Procedure (Skip By Day)
Overview
The F2=SKIP BY DAY feature offers an alternative method of
watering over the standard water day selection schedule. This
option selects a number of days between watering regardless of
the actual day of the week or date.
If the number of days between watering cycles is specified as
two days, the program will not water for two days and will then
water for one day. The next two days will not water and then
watering will occur again. This watering sequence will continue
indefinitely until the program is changed.
The available number of skip days ranges from 1 to 90 days.
The user also specifies when the first water day will occur.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the F2=SKIP BY DAY selection menu
through the following key sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F2=Water Days
F2=Skip By Day
P# NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN WATERING:__ ENTER
DAYS TO SKIP (1-90)
|½|
Figure 86: Skip By Day Entry
Page 98
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Step 2
Enter the number of days between watering and then
press ENTER. The number of days must be between
1 and 90.
Step 3
Enter the number of days until the first watering and
then press ENTER. The number of days before
watering must be between 0 and 90 days.
P# DAYS UNTIL FIRST WATER: __
ENTER DAYS (1-90),
0=START TODAY
|½|
Figure 87: Start Water Day
To start watering today, enter 0 (zero) as the number
of days until first watering, and then press ENTER.
The controller returns to the Modify Program Option
display menu.
This completes the SKIP BY DAY procedure.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 99
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Water Days Procedure (31 Day Cycle)
Overview
The F3=31 DAY CYCLE option provides the ability to select the
watering dates (from 1 - 31) for a monthly period. When
programmed, the 31 Day Cycle will water on the dates specified
for the month period and will continue to do so in the same
manner in all subsequent months. The watering routine will
remain indefinitely until the program is changed.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the F3=31 DAY CYCLE selection menu
through the following key sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F2=Water Days
F3=31 Day Cycle
P# : NONE
ENTER DAYS 1 – 8 |1|- |8|
|¾||½|
Figure 88: 31 Days Cycle Entry
Step 2
Enter water dates 1 through 8 and then press
ENTER. To delete a date, press the corresponding
number key and verify that it blinks, and then press
ENTER.
Step 3
Press the Down Arrow key to advance to the next 8
dates of the month (9-16).
Page 100
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 4
DX2 User Manual
Enter water dates 9 through 16 and then press
ENTER.
Note:
Keypad numbers 1-8 will record dates 9-16
respectively in the display.
Step 5
Press the Down Arrow key to advance to the next 8
dates of the month (17-24).
Step 6
Enter water dates 17 through 24 and press ENTER.
Note:
Keypad numbers 1-8 will record dates 17-24
respectively in the display.
Step 7
Press the Down Arrow key to advance to the
remaining 7 dates of the month (25-31).
Step 8
Enter the water dates 25 - 31 and press ENTER.
Step 9
Note:
Keypad numbers 1-7 will record dates 25-31
respectively in the display.
Note:
The 31 day cycle entries are programmed to accept
all dates regardless of the month. Months with less
than 31 days are automatically adjusted in the
program to disregard non-existent dates.
Press the Down Arrow key to return to the Modify
Program Option display.
Press QUIT key to return to the base menu.
This completes the 31 DAY WATER CYCLE
procedure.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 101
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Stations
Overview
Every valid program must have one or more stations assigned to
it. Additionally, each station must have a programmed runtime
(the amount of time that the station is active). The Evolution
DX2 Controllers can be configured from 6 stations up to 48
stations in increments of 6 stations. The number of stations
available will be displayed in the select station number screen, as
depicted in Figure 5-10.
Stations are specified through the Run Time options menu,
which selects the station number and its run time.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Run Time Options selection menu
through the following key sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F3=Stations
P# STATIONS:
NONE
|¾||½|
Figure 89: Stations
This screen lists which stations are active for the
given program.
Step 2
Page 102
Press the Down Arrow to advance to the Run Time
options menu.
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
P # |F1|=STATION RUN TIME
|F2|=QUICK STATION PROGRAMMING
DX2 User Manual
|¾||½|
Figure 90: Station Run Time Options
The Station Run Time Options are displayed.
There are two options:
Station Run Time - Programs individual station
run times.
Quick Station Programming - Enter the same
run times for groups of stations.
Station Run Time Option
Programming Individual Stations with Different Run
Times
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Station Number Entry screen
through the following key sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F3=Stations
Down Arrow
F1=Station Run Time
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 103
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
P# STATION NUMBER: ___
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-48)
|½|
Figure 91: Select Station Number
Step 2
Enter the Station Number. The number must be
between 1 and 48. Press ENTER.
Note:
Step 3
The maximum number of stations is determined by
the total stations installed in the associated
controller. The maximum number will appear on
the Station Number Entry Display screen.
Enter the Run Time in the format indicated, then
Press ENTER.
P# STATION# RUN TIME:
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
: ___
|½|
Figure 92: Station Run Time Entry
The formats are HH:MM (hours: minutes) and
MM:SS (minutes: seconds).
Note:
Time formats may be changed for each program.
Go to Setup Programs, Time Format to change the
format. (Refer to chapter 4, page 12)
Step 4
The next station number is displayed. Repeat the
process entering the Run Time for each station, as
necessary, press ENTER after each entry.
Step 5
Press the Up Arrow key to return to the Station
Number Entry menu, enter a different station
number. Repeat as required.
This completes the Station Run Time Entry procedure.
Page 104
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Quick Station Programming Option
Programming Station Groups with Identical Run Time
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Beginning Station Number Entry
screen through the following key sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F3=Stations
Down Arrow
F2=Quick Station Programming
P# BEGINNING QUICK STATION NUMBER: ___
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-48)
|¾||½|
Figure 93: Quick Station Number Entry
Step 2
Enter the Beginning Station Number. The number
must be between 1 and 48 and then press ENTER.
Step 3
Enter the Ending Station Number and then press
ENTER. The number must be between the beginning
station number and 48.
Step 4
Enter the Run Time Per Station.
P# RUN TIME PER STATION:
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
: ___
|½|
Figure 5-14: Quick Station Run Time
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 105
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 5
Px
DX2 User Manual
Press the Down Arrow to view the total run time for
the entire program.
RUN TIME IS XX HOURS AND XX MINUTES
|¾||½|
Figure 94: Quick Station Total Runtime
This completes the Quick Station Programming procedure.
Press QUIT to return to the base menu.
Page 106
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Percent
Overview
The Percent feature provides the ability to alter the run times of
all stations in a given program. Reducing the percentage factor
will shorten all run times, i.e. a station run time programmed for
10 minutes would run for 5 minutes when the percentage is set to
50%. Conversely, the station would run for 20 minutes when the
percentage is set to 200%.
The available percentage range is between 0 and 999%.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Percentage Run Time Entry screen
through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
F4=Percent
P# PERCENTAGE OF STATION RUN TIME:
ENTER PERCENTAGE (0-999)
100
|½|
Figure 95: Percentage Run Time
Step 2
Enter the percentage of station run time and then
press ENTER. The percentage must be between 0
and 999.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 107
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Percentage Example:
Assume station 1 has a runtime of 10 minutes,
station 2 has a run time of 20 minutes and station 3
has a run time of 30 minutes.
Percent is used to change the run time of all three
stations. For example, set the percent to 50%. The
run time for station 1 becomes 5 minutes (50% of
the original run time of 10 minutes), station 2
becomes 10 minutes and station 3 the run time is 15
minutes.
Change the percent to 200 percent and the run times
for stations 1 through 3 become, 20, 40 and 60
minutes, respectively.
Note:
Changing the percent does not change the displayed
run time station value as shown when stations are
reviewed or modified. The controller automatically
re-computes (adjusts for percent) when the program
executes.
This completes the Percent procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 108
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Send (Applies to Central Control Systems only)
Overview
Send provides a warning only, to indicate that a program has
been changed. When used with the Evolution Central Control
System, the warning will automatically appear at the Central
Computer. The Central Computer may then elect to "upload" the
modified program. See Chapter 9 for additional details on
Central Control operations.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Modify Program Option screen
through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter P #
P# |F1|=PROGRAM START |F2|=WATER DAYS
|F3|=STATIONS|F4|=PERCENT |F5|=SEND |½|
Figure 96: Modify Program
Step 2
Select F5=SEND. The following message is
displayed:
P# PROGRAM UPLOAD REQUEST
|½|
Figure 97: Program Upload Request
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 109
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
When the Central Control System Computer contacts the
Evolution DX2 controller, the program may be uploaded and the
entry is cleared from the report list.
This completes the Send procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 110
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F1 Program
F3
New Program
New Program
Overview
The F3=New Program feature is used to create a new controller
program. The user is prompted for all necessary data required in
order to create a valid program. A new program session will
sequentially display the following settings:
Program Number
Day Cycle Watering Routine For Each Station
(14 Day, Skip by Day, 31 Day)
Start Time For Each Station
Run Time For Each Station
All remaining parameters of the program are automatically set to
the default settings. Refer to Chapter 4: Setup for a listing of all
default settings.
To make any additional changes or modifications to the program,
refer to the Modify Program section in this chapter.
Extensive program changes require the use of the Setup Menu as
described in Chapter 4: Setup.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 111
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
New Program Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Program Entry Number screen
through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F3=New Program
Enter P #
P# |F1|=14 DAY CYCLE |F2|=SKIP BY DAY
|F3|=31 DAY CYCLE
NOW=F1
|½|
Figure 98: Water Day Cycle Options
Note:
Entering programming data for all screens under
New Program insures that a valid program exists
upon completion of the functions.
Note:
NOW=F1 indicates the currently selected option.
Step 2
Select the Watering Cycle Mode then press ENTER.
There are three options:
14 DAY CYCLE - selects water days based on a 14
day (two week) cycle.
SKIP BY DAY- selects the number of days skipped
between watering days.
31 DAY CYCLE - selects water days based on a
31 day (monthly) cycle.
Refer to the "Water Day Options" procedure located
in this chapter for programming of individual water
days.
Page 112
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 3
DX2 User Manual
Follow the Station Run Time Options procedure
located in this chapter to complete the New Program
procedure.
This completes the New Program procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
F1 Main Menu
F1 Program
F2
Review Program
Review Program
Review Program is used to view the parameters of a program
stored in the Evolution DX2. The settings are made available
only for viewing and may not be changed or altered. Review
Program displays the following program settings:
Program Number
Water Days
o
14 Day Cycle or
o
31 Day Cycle or
o
Skip by Day Cycle
Start Times
Stations
Station Duration Time
Total Run Time
Percent
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 113
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
In addition to run times, many other parameters may be
established on a per station basis. Use Setup Stations to establish
these parameters, which include current limits, flow limits and
station type.
Review Program Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Review Program View screen
through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F2=Review Program
PROGRAM NUMBER: P # ___
ENTER PROGRAM TO BE REVIEWED (1-12)
|½|
Figure 99: Program Entry
Step 2
Enter the program number and then press ENTER.
The program number must be between 1 and 12.
Step 3
Review watering days.
P# : SU
TU
TH
SA
WATER DAYS FOR WEEK 1
|¾||½|
Figure 100: Week 1 Water Days
The display shown is a 14 day cycle.
Note:
Page 114
It may be necessary to press the Down Arrow one or
more times to view the complete water day’s
schedule.
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Step 4
Press the Down Arrow and review Start Time 1.
Repeat as necessary to review additional start times.
Step 5
Press the Down Arrow and review stations for the
program.
Step 6
Press the Down Arrow and review Station Duration
times. Repeat as necessary to review additional run
times.
Step 7
Press the Down Arrow and review total program
Run Time.
Step 8
Press the Down Arrow and review program Percent.
Step 9
Press the Down Arrow to enter a new program
number for review.
Step 10
Press the Up Arrow to return to the previous menu.
Repeat as necessary.
This completes the Review Program procedure.
To make any changes, refer to the Modify Program
section.
Press QUIT to return to the base menu.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 115
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F1 Program
F4
Clear Program
Clear Program
Clear Program is used to remove an existing program that is no
longer used or a program that is to be replaced by a new
program. All program start, station run times, and water days are
removed. Percentage is reset to 100%.
Note:
Clear Program does not change the Setup
information for the program.
Clear Program Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Clear Program Number screen
through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F4=Clear Program
PROGRAM NUMBER: P ___
ENTER PROGRAM TO BE CLEARED (1-12)
|½|
Figure 101: Program Clear Number
Step 2
Enter the program number to be cleared.
Step 3
Press ENTER to clear the program.
Step 4
To clear additional programs, repeat entry of the
program numbers.
This completes the Clear Program procedure.
Press QUIT to return to the base menu.
Page 116
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Program
On/Off
Program On/Off
The Program On/Off feature is an extremely useful tool for
testing, running or stopping any given program. This front panel
touch key is a toggle action switch, which when pressed the first
time, acts upon the program accordingly (turns on or off) and
when pressed again restores the program to its original state.
The following lists various situations when the Program On/Off
features might be used:
Unexpected rainfall - When a program is watering during a
sudden rainfall uses the Program On/Off to stop
watering. The program will remain off until its next
regularly scheduled water day and start time.
Excessive hot, dry weather conditions - When a program is
set to water every other day, additional watering may be
required. Activate the Program On/Off to water on the
off day. The program will start immediately and run
through its normal routine until complete. When
complete, the program will resume its normal watering
days.
Testing a program - A program that is set to water in
upcoming days may be immediately tested to evaluate its
performance. When complete, the program will start at
its regular time.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 117
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Program On/Off Procedure
Stopping a program
Note:
The Program On/Off feature is only effective on
existing programs. If no programs exist, the
Program On/Off is inoperative.
This procedure assumes that a program is currently running.
Step 1
A running program will be displayed on the base
screen indicating the program number, station
number, and the station runtime remaining.
Step 2
Press the Program On/Off key. Enter the program
number and then press ENTER.
Note:
Multiple programs may be simultaneously turned
off by entering 0 followed by ENTER.
Step 3
The program will stop and the base menu will be
displayed.
Step 4
The program will resume operation on its next
scheduled water day and start time.
Page 118
Chapter 5: Program Entry
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Starting a Program
Step 1
Verify a valid program is available by observing the
base screen. All valid programs will be listed in the
Valid Pgm: section.
Step 2
Press the Program On/Off key. Enter the program
number and then press ENTER.
The program start time and water day will be
disregarded and the program will immediately start
running.
The complete program watering routine will be
executed. When completed, the program will
resume on its next regularly scheduled water day and
start time.
This completes the Program On/Off procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Chapter 5:Program Entry
Page 119
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 6
Individual Station Control
I
ndividual Station Control (ISC) is used to obtain a high degree
of control over single stations. ISC is typically applied to uses
such as lighting, operation of water fountains and certain
specialized irrigation applications.
ISC operation may be best illustrated by the following example:
Assume water fountains are to be turned on each day
from 8:00 AM until 5:00 PM. However on each
Wednesday, the fountains must remain off so
maintenance and cleaning can be performed. Similarly,
assume that lighting is to be turned on each day from
6:00 PM until 6:00 AM.
Separate ISCs are programmed to control the two
different functions. The program to control the water
fountains, ISC 1, would operate each day except
Wednesday with a start time of 8:00 AM and would use
a "runtime" of nine hours. The program to control the
lighting, ISC 2, would be on each day with a start time
of 6:00 PM and a run time of 12 hours.
Page 120
Chapter 6: Individual Station Control
ISC
Chapter 6:
Individual Station Control (ISC) is quite similar to creating and
operating a program, as described in Chapter 5. In fact, ISC can
be thought of as 48 programs each of which share a common
runtime. ISC and basic programs can be intermixed as desired to
meet your control needs for special circumstances.
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
To use ISC, you need the following information:
• The station number to be controlled
• The cycle type (14 day, skip by day, 31 day)
• The days for the station to be operated (referred to as
"water days")
• Station start times (up to eight start times can be
accommodated)
• The run time of the station
Chapter 6:Individual Station Control
Page 121
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F2
ISC
ISC
Individual Station Control (ISC) is used for obtaining a high
degree of control over single stations.
Use the programming steps described in Chapter 5 to create,
modify, review and clear ISCs. As noted previously, ISC and
basic programming steps are virtually identical.
|F1|=MODIFY ISC |F2|=REVIEW ISC
|F3|=NEW ISC
|F4|=CLEAR ISC
|½|
Figure 102: ISC
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 122
Chapter 6: Individual Station Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 7
System Status
There are four System Status options:
•
COMM STATUS is used by Rain Master Irrigation
Systems (RMIS) field service personnel for diagnostic
purposes when the controller is connected to a RMIS
Central Control System.
•
Select MEASUREMENTS to review flow, current,
EvapoTranspiration (ET), wind and rain.
•
Select WATER TOTAL to review the total water
consumption for the current and past month.
•
Select REVIEW ALL to review all settings for all
programs.
The System Status screen is available through the following
menus:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
|F1|=COMM STATUS
|F3|=WATER TOTAL
|F2|=MEASUREMENTS
|F4|=REVIEW ALL |½|
Chapter 7: System Status
System Status
Chapter 7:
Figure 103: System Status Options
Page 123
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F3 Status
F1
Comm Status
Comm Status
Communication Status is used by Rain Master Irrigation Systems
(RMIS) field service personnel for diagnostic purposes.
|F1|=LINE MONITOR |F2|=CENTRAL-SUBMASTER
|F3|=SUBMASTER-SATELLITE
|½|
Figure 104: Comm Status
Page 124
Chapter 7: System Status
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F3 Status
F2
Measurements
Measurements
Use Measurements to review flow, current, EvapoTranspiration
(ET), wind and rain.
There are five options.
DYNAMIC DISPLAY:
•
Select FLOW METER to view the flow meter readings.
•
Select CURRENT METER to view the current
measurements.
•
Select MOISTURE SENSOR READINGS to view
moisture sensor readings.
Note: Use of moisture sensors are no longer supported by
Rain Master Irrigation Systems.
•
Select RAIN/WIND to view instantaneous wind and
rainfall.
STATIC DISPLAY:
•
Select ET to view the current day's EvapoTranspiration.
Note:
DYNAMIC DISPLAY indicates that the information
is updated continuously in the display.
STATIC DISPLAY indicates that the display is only
updated once (upon initial entry to the function).
Chapter 7: System Status
Page 125
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Measurements Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Measurements Option screen as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
F2=Measurements
|F1|=FLOW
|F2|=CURRENT
|F3|=MOISTURE |F4|=ET |F5|=RAIN/WIND |½|
Figure 105: Measurements Option
Step 2
Select F1= FLOW. The real time readings for flow
meters 1 and 2 are shown in Gallons Per Minute
(GPM). The total for both meters is also shown.
The display is updated every 10 seconds.
FLOW #1 GPM=200
FLOW # 2 GPM=160
TOTAL GPM=360
|½|
Figure 106: Flow Meter Measurements
Note:
If the Flow Max feature has been set up and the
controller operates as a Submaster, the display will
contain additional information as described in
Appendix E: Flow Max.
Return to Measurement Option screen using the Up
Arrow key.
Step 3
Page 126
Select F2=CURRENT. The current meter shows the
electrical current in amps being drawn by active
stations including the master valve and pump (The
measurement is the sum of all field valve solenoids
which are on).
Chapter 7: System Status
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
CURRENT
DX2 User Manual
(I)=X.XX AMP
|½|
Figure 107: Current Meter Measurements
Press the Up Arrow to return to the Measurement
Options screen.
Step 4
Select F3=Moisture.
Note:
Use of moisture sensors are no longer supported by
Rain Master Irrigation Systems.
Press the Up Arrow to return to the Measurement
Options screen.
Step 5
Select F4=ET. The ET readings are displayed
for the last seven days. The current day of the
week (today) indicates the current ET
accumulated since 12:00 midnight. Completed
days show the total ET value for the 24 hour
period starting and ending at midnight.
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
.20 .19 .24
.26 .25 .16 .05 ET-INCHES|½|
Figure 108: ET
Press the Up Arrow key to return to the
Measurement Option screen.
Chapter 7: System Status
Page 127
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 6
DX2 User Manual
Select F5=RAIN/WIND. The current day's rain fall
accumulation and wind speed is displayed.
RAIN = 005
WIND = 010
.01/INCH
MPH
|½|
Figure 109: Rain/Wind Readings
The rain shows the total number of counts measured from the
tipping bucket rain gauge since midnight. Each count represents
1/100 of an inch of rain.
Note:
This rain count is cleared every day at midnight.
This completes the System Status procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to base menu.
Page 128
Chapter 7: System Status
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F3 Status
F3
Water Total
Water Total
Use Water Total to review the consumption for the current and
past month.
There are two options:
•
TOTALS PAST MONTH - Displays total gallons of
water used during the previous month.
•
TOTALS PRESENT MONTH - Displays the total
gallons of water used to date during the current month.
Water Total Procedure
Step 1
Proceed to the Water Total screen as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
F3=Water Total
|F1|=TOTALS PAST MONTH
|F2|=TOTALS PRESENT MONTH
|½|
Figure 110: Water Totals
Step 2
Select F1=TOTALS PAST MONTH. The total
gallons (G) of water for flow meter 1 and 2 are
displayed.
The sum of both meters is also displayed.
Chapter 7: System Status
Page 129
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FLOW #1 PAST G=150
FLOW #2 PAST G=50
TOTAL G=0
|½|
Figure 111: Past Month Water Totals
Press the Up Arrow to return to Water Totals menu.
Step 3
Select F2=TOTALS PRESENT MONTH. The total
gallons (G) for flow meter 1 and 2 are displayed.
The sum of both meters is also displayed.
This completes the Water Total Procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 130
Chapter 7: System Status
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F3 Status
F4
Review All
Review All
Use Review All to review all settings for all programs.
Procedure
Step 1
Proceed to the first Review All screen as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
F4=Review All
P 1 : SU TU TH
WATER DAYS FOR WEEK 1
|½|
Figure 112: Review Water Days
Watering days are shown for the lowest numbered program
(The display shown is a 14-day water cycle).
Note:
Step 2
It may be necessary to press the Down Arrow key
several times to view all watering days.
Press Down Arrow key. The program Start Time 1 is
displayed.
Repeat as necessary to display additional start times.
Chapter 7: System Status
Page 131
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Step 3
Press Down Arrow key. The Defined Stations for
the program are displayed.
Step 4
Press Down Arrow key. The Station Run Time for
each station within the program is displayed.
Repeat as necessary to display run time for all
defined stations.
Step 5
Press Down Arrow key. The program Total Run
Time is displayed.
Step 6
Press Down Arrow key. The program Percent value
is displayed.
If the controller has more than one program defined,
the data for additional programs will be
automatically displayed by pressing the Down
Arrow key.
ISC data appears after all program data has been
reviewed.
Step 7
Press Down Arrow key. The Injector Station, if any,
is displayed.
Step 8
Press Down Arrow key. The version of the
Evolution Controller software, the date of the
software release and the time are displayed.
Note:
If the Flow Max feature is utilized, configuration
information showing device connections verses
controller addresses is displayed.
This completes the Program Review procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 132
Chapter 7: System Status
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 8
Manual System Control
Manual control is used to operate a program, a single station,
group of stations or all stations. Manual control is also used to
select the rain shutdown option, which stops watering for an
indefinite amount of time.
There are four options.
•
Select TEST to operate all stations sequentially for a
selected length of time. The TEST mode provides
extensive information showing both the electrical current
and the gallons per minute used.
•
Select MULTI-STATION to manually control several
stations at once. This mode allows independent control
of the station and the master valve and/or pump.
•
Select STATION to manually control a single station.
This mode turns on any station and automatically selects
the proper master valve and pump.
•
Select RAIN OFF to stop watering for up to an indefinite
amount of time.
F1=Main Menu
F4=Manual & Rain Off
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Manual Control
Figure 113: Manual Main Menu
Chapter 8:
MANUAL: |F1|=TEST |F2|=MULTI-STATION
|F3|=STATION |F4|=RAIN OFF
|½|
Page 133
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F4 Manual & Rain Off
F1
Test
Test
Manual test mode allows the user to automatically advance from
station to station using manually entered run time, while
displaying valve solenoid electrical current for each station, as
well as station flow in GPM.
Use Test to operate all stations sequentially for a specified length
of time.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Test Time Per Station screen as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F4=Manual & Rain Off
F1=Test
OPERATION TIME PER STATION: :
ENTER TIME PER STATION (HH:MM)
|½|
Figure 114: Operation Time
Step 2
Enter the run time. Enter the run times in Hour:
Minutes (HH:MM) format.
Press ENTER key.
Page 134
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The test starts with the following display:
TEST STATION 1 0:01:00 I=0.25 GPM=50
|F1|=NEXT |F2|=PREVIOUS
|½|
Figure 115: Program Testing
The screen displays:
•
Test Station Number
•
Count-down of the specified run time
•
Electrical current in amps (I=X.XX) drawn by
the field valve solenoid
•
Flow in Gallons Per Minute (GPM)
When completed, the controller is incremented to the
next station and the test is repeated. The completion
of the last station returns to the Manual Main Menu
screen.
Step 3
Press F1=NEXT anytime during the test routine to
turn off the current station and turn on the next
sequential station, if any.
Step 4
Press F2=PREVIOUS anytime during the test
routine to turn off the current station and turn on the
previous station, if any.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 135
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
DX2 User Manual
Prior to a station turning on, the station is analyzed
by the controller to determine if the station is used
in an existing program.
If the station is used in a program and the program
includes a master valve or pump, the controller will
activate the master valve/pump with the station.
If the station is not used by any program, no master
valve or pump will be activated for that station.
This completes the Manual Test procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 136
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F4 Manual & Rain Off
F2
Multi-Station
Multi-Station
Manual multi-station mode allows any single station or output to
be turned on individually or in combination with any other
station(s). Valve solenoid electrical current is displayed.
Use Multi-Station to manually control several stations at once.
Multi-Station can also be used to operate stations independent of
any Master Valve or Pump.
Multi-Station is additionally useful in analyzing problems by
locating defective stations or devices (refer to Multi-Station
Diagnostics procedure, page 8-9).
Procedure
Step 1
Proceed to the Multi-Station option display as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F4=Manual & Rain Off
F2=Multi-Station
|F1|=STATION ON CONCURRENTLY
|F2|=STATION ON SEQUENTIALLY
|½|
Figure 116: Multi-Station Options
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 137
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The screen displays two options:
•
Select STATION ON CONCURRENTLY to
operate several stations at the same time or to
run a station independent of any Master Valve
and/or Pump.
•
Select STATION ON SEQUENTIALLY to
operate each station in sequential order.
Step 2
Select F1=STATION ON CONCURRENTLY.
Step 3
Enter the Run Time, then press ENTER. Run time
must be between 0 and 59 minutes.
Step 4
Enter the station number. The number must be
between 1 and 48, then press ENTER. The station
will turn on.
Step 5
Enter zero (0X) to select the master valve/pump.
01 = MV1
02 = MV2
03 = N.O. MV
04 = Pump
Step 6
Enter additional station numbers as necessary.
Stations selected are shown on the display.
Note:
Stations may be alternately turned On/Off (toggled)
by re-entering the station number followed by the
ENTER key.
At the end of the run time, the Multi-Station Option
menu is displayed, or presses the Up Arrow key to
display the previous menu.
Step 7
Page 138
Manually Entered Program
Allows user to enter a one-time program to be run
immediately or scheduled for later in the day. The
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
manual program is independent of automatic
programs and will start only one time.
To manually enter a consecutive list of stations to
sequentially run one after the other:
Select F2=STATION ON SEQUENTIALLY.
|F1|=STATION ON CONCURRENTLY
|F2|=STATION ON SEQUENTIALLY
|½|
Figure 117: Station on Sequentially
Note:
This one-time program will execute either
immediately or at a future time. Once executed, the
stations must be re-entered in order to operate
again.
Four options are given:
Step 8
•
Select ENTER STATIONS to enter the station
numbers to be turned on.
•
Select CLEAR ALL to remove all stations from
sequential manual control.
•
Select START NOW to start manual operation
immediately.
•
Select START LATER to enter a time for the
stations to be operated.
Select F1=ENTER STATIONS.
Enter the station number. The number must be
between 1 and 48. Then press the ENTER key.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 139
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
Step 9
DX2 User Manual
The maximum number of stations is determined by
the total stations installed in the associated satellite
controller. The maximum number will appear on
the Station Number Entry Display screen.
Enter the Run Time. Run time must be in Hour:
Minutes (HH:MM) format, then press the ENTER
key.
STATION RUN TIME: :
ENTER TIME(HH:MM)
|½|
Figure 118: Station Run Time
Step 10
Enter additional station numbers and run times, as
necessary.
You may enter up to 10 stations. If the station is not
used by a program or ISC, you are then prompted to
select whether the Master Valve is to be used with
the station.
Step 11
If required; choose a selection from the four Master
Valve options:
F1=MV1
F2=MV2
F3=N.O.
F4=None
If a Master Valve is selected, select one of the two
Pump options:
F1=Pump
F2=None
Step 12
Page 140
Press the Up Arrow key to return to the Station On
Sequentially menu.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Clear All- If a programming error is made, select:
F2=CLEAR ALL.
All station numbers and run times are cleared.
Return to F1= ENTER STATIONS and re-enter the
correct stations and run times.
Step 13
The Start Now option immediately executes the
entered stations.
Select F3=START NOW. The stations selected are
run in numerical order.
When completed, the screen returns to the previous
menu.
Step 14
Start Later postpones or delays the manual
execution.
Select F4=START LATER.
START TIME: : AM
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
|F1|=AM/PM
|½|
Figure 119: Start Later Time
Step 15
Enter the start time.
Enter times in 12 hour or 24 hour format.
If 12 hour time format is selected, use the
F1=AM/PM toggle key to select AM or PM.
To change time format, go to Setup Controller, User
Options, Time/Date.
Press ENTER. The base menu is displayed.
The stations will turn on at the specified time in a
sequential fashion.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 141
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Multi-Station Diagnostics
Using Multi-Station for diagnostics is an effective tool in
locating station field wiring problems. Detected problems that
produce warning messages may be checked and isolated through
manual testing. Warning messages displaying failures in
stations, Master Valves/Pump, etc. will indicate the specific
stations and devices that were running at the time of failure. The
Multi-Station feature exercises the stations or devices which
isolates the specific problem area.
Example: Assume a warning condition occurred as the result
of running an automatic program. The warning
appears in the display as follows:
WARNING = SHORT CIRCUIT
STA = PUMP, MV, 1, 5
06/27/96
12:05AM
|¾||½|
Figure 120: Warning, Short Circuit
The warning indicates that the Pump, Master Valve 1, station 1
and station 5 were all running at the time of failure. A short
circuit condition may exist in any of the listed items. The
following procedure provides a way to isolate which output is
shorted:
Diagnostic Procedure
Step 1
Page 142
Examine the warning message to identify station
numbers, Master Valves/Pump, etc. Record all
identified items.
If multiple short circuit warnings appear, the
problem is most likely a short in the Master Valve
and/or Pump circuit.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 2
DX2 User Manual
Advance to the Multi-Station option display as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F4=Manual & Rain Off
F2=Multi-Station
|F1|=STATION ON CONCURRENTLY
|F2|=STATION ON SEQUENTIALLY
|½|
Figure 121: Multi-Station Options
Step 3
Select F1=STATION ON CONCURRENTLY. The
following screen is displayed:
RUN TIME: 10
ENTER TIME (0 – 59 MINUTES)
|½|
Figure 122: Run Time Entry
Step 4
To run for 10 minutes, enter 10 then press ENTER.
The following screen is displayed:
ON:
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-48,
OX=MV)
|½|
Figure 123: Station/Device Entry
Step 5
The Master Valve/Pump is selected by any number
between 1 and 4 which is preceded by a 0 (zero).
The Master Valve/Pump selections are:
• MV1=01
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 143
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
•
•
•
MV2=02
N.O.=03
Pump=04
Enter the station or device numbers from the
warning display, one at a time. Press the ENTER
key after each entry. As each entry is made, the
result appears on the display, as depicted in Figure
8-12.
ON: PUMP, MV1, 1, 5
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-49,
OX=MV)
|½|
Figure 124: Station/Device Entry
Example: Enter the following short circuit warnings:
04
01
1
5
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
<ENTER>
(pump)
(MV1)
Station 1
Station 5
When a problem is detected in a station or device,
the Multi-Station operation is immediately aborted
and the display returns to the base menu. The base
menu will then display the warning.
Step 6
The station or device is now identified and can be
corrected accordingly.
Step 7
IMPORTANT: To clear all warnings from the base
screen, select the F2=WARNING to display the first
problem in the list. Continue to press the Down
Arrow to display any additional warnings, if present.
After the last warning is displayed, press
F1=CLEAR REPORT MESSAGES to Clear Report
Messages. All problems in the list are erased.
Page 144
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This completes the Multi-Station Diagnostic procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
F1 Main Menu
F4 Manual & Rain Off
F3
Station
Station
Manual station feature turns on any station for a specified time
and automatically selects usage of the proper Master Valve
and/or Pump for this station. The valve solenoid electrical
current is displayed.
Use Station to manually control a single station and/or sequence
through the stations using the next/previous station key prompts.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the station Number Entry screen as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F4=Manual & Rain Off
F3=Station
STATION OR ISC NUMBER:
ENTER STATION NUMBER (1-12)
|½|
Figure 125: Station Number Entry
Step 2
Enter the station or ISC number then press ENTER.
The following option screen is displayed:
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 145
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
|F1|=TURN ON STATION
|F2|=CANCEL ISC STATION
|½|
Figure 126: Station Options
There are two options.
Step 3
•
Select TURN ON STATION to turn on the
selected station.
•
Select CANCEL ISC STATION to cancel
operation of an Individual Station Control (ISC)
station.
Select F1=TURN ON STATION.
Enter the run time in Hour: Minutes (HH:MM)
format. Then press ENTER.
STATION 1 RUN TIME:
ENTER TIME (HH:MM)
|½|
Figure 127: Run Time Entry
The station will start. The screen displays the
following information:
Page 146
•
Station Number
•
Station On/Off Status
•
Count-down of Run Time
•
Master Valve/Pump (if applicable)
•
Electrical current in amps (I=X.XX)
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
STATION 1=ON 0:04:25
I=0.05
|F1|=ON/OFF |F2|=NEXT |F3|=PREVIOUS|½|
Figure 128: Station Run Status
Note:
Prior to a station turning on, the station is analyzed
by the controller to determine if the station is used
in an existing program.
If the station is used in a program and the program
includes a Master Valve or Pump, the controller will
activate the Master Valve or Pump with the station.
If the station is not used by any program, no Master
Valve or Pump will be activated for that station.
Step 4
F1=ON/OFF
The F1=ON/OFF toggle key alternately turns the
station on and off.
Press F1=ON /OFF and verify that the station status
changes accordingly.
The run time will continue to count down whether
the station is on or off.
Step 5
F2=NEXT
The F2=NEXT key turns off the current station and
turns on the next station. The process continues
until the last station of the controller is reached.
Press the F2=NEXT key and verify that the next
station turns on.
The Run Time will continue to count down
regardless of station number.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 147
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Controllers are equipped with station configurations
that range from 6 to 48 in increments of six stations.
If the last station is displayed, the F2=NEXT key
advances to station 1.
Step 6
F3=PREVIOUS
The F3=PREVIOUS key turns off the current station
and turns on the previous station. If currently at
station 1, the F3=PREVIOUS key decrements to the
last station in the controller configuration.
The Run Time will continue to count down
regardless of the station number.
Step 7
Press the Up Arrow to return to the Manual On/Off
menu options.
MANUAL: |F1|=TEST
|F2|=MULTI-STATION
|F3|=STATION |F4|=RAIN OFF
|½|
Figure 129: Manual Operations Menu
This completes the Manual Operations procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 148
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1 Main Menu
F4 Manual & Rain Off
F4
Rain Off
Rain Off
Use the Rain Off mode to stop watering for either a programmed
amount of days or to turn off the controller for an indefinite
amount of time.
Procedure
Step 1
Proceed to the Rain Off Option menu as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F4=Manual & Rain Off
F4=Rain Off
|F1|=RAIN SHUTDOWN |F2|=NO WATER WINDOW
|F3|=PROGRAMMABLE RAIN SHUTDOWN
|½|
Figure 130: Rain Off
There are three options:
•
Select RAIN SHUTDOWN to stop all watering
indefinitely until manually returned to the
automatic mode.
•
Select NO WATER WINDOW to enter a period
of time (up to 23 hours and 59 minutes) to
establish a time period during the day when
watering is not allowed.
•
Select PROGRAMMABLE RAIN
SHUTDOWN to stop watering from one to
seven days.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 149
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 2
DX2 User Manual
Select F1=RAIN SHUTDOWN.
RAIN SHUTDOWN: OFF
|F1|=ON |F2|=OFF (AUTOMATIC MODE)
|½|
Figure 131: Rain Shutdown
Press F1=ON to place the controller in rain
shutdown mode.
Warning:
Note:
When rain shutdown is ON, No Watering
will occur (assuming the program has rain
shutdown enabled. See Setup, Program,
Rain Shutdown, Chapter 4).
During rain shutdown, the base screen displays
"RAIN SHUTDOWN" in place of the valid
programs list.
To start automatic watering operations again, rain
shutdown mode must be turned Off.
Step 3
Press F2=OFF to return the controller to automatic
mode.
Step 4
If a no water window is desired, select F2=NO
WATER WINDOW.
NO WATER WINDOW selects a period of time (up
to 23 hours and 59 minutes) to establish a time
period during the day when watering is not allowed.
Page 150
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Enter the start time for when the no watering
period is to occur in Hour: Minutes (HH:MM)
format.
If 12 hour time format is selected for the
controller, use F1=AM/PM toggle key to select
AM or PM, and then press ENTER.
START TIME FOR WINDOW: 5:00 PM
ENTER TIME (HH:MM) |F1|=AM / PM
|½|
Figure 132: No Water Window Time
Enter the end time for no watering period to occur in
Hour: Minutes (HH:MM) format, then press
ENTER.
Note:
Step 5
Any scheduled start times which occur during the
no water window period will be ignored. Also,
attempting to start a program with the PROGRAM
ON/OFF key will have no effect.
Programmable Rain Shutdown allows a controller to
be off for a specified number of days.
Select F3=PROGRAMMABLE RAIN
SHUTDOWN.
NUMBER OF RAIN SHUTDOWN DAYS:
ENTER NUMBER OF DAYS (1-7)
3
|½|
Figure 133: Programmable Rain Shutdown
Enter the number of days for no watering (rain
shutdown), then press ENTER.
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Page 151
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The Manual On/Off menu options are displayed.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Once programmable rain days have been entered, the base menu
shows RAIN SHUTDOWN DAYS LEFT=X, where X is the
number of programmed days entered.
This number automatically decrements at 12:00 AM each day.
Note:
Non irrigation programs are not affected by rain
shutdown and will continue to operate as
programmed.
This completes the procedure for Manual Rain Off.
Page 152
Chapter 8: Manual System Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 9
Central Control
The Evolution DX2 controller may be used in either a stand-
Chapter 9: Central Control
Central Control
Chapter 9:
alone mode or under control of a Central Control System. Under
this Central Control mode, a host computer provides direction
and monitoring of the controller.
Any controller (directly or indirectly) connected to the Central
Control Computer is called a "satellite." A "submaster" is a
satellite controller with specific communications capability. The
submaster may operate as a stand-alone unit, a communication
control unit for multiple satellites or a communication
management control unit within a Flow Max system.
The submaster can communicate directly with a Rain Master
Irrigation Systems (RMIS) Central Control Computer in one of
seven ways - via UHF radio, telephone, direct connection (wire),
phone repeater, trunk radio, cellular, and Ethernet.
Each submaster can provide hardwire communications support
to a maximum of 100 satellite controllers.
To help control communications, all controllers connected to the
Central Control computer are given an "address." After the
address is assigned, the base screen is changed to show the
satellite address.
The purpose of this chapter is to provide general information
about Central Control Mode setup and operation.
Page 153
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Controller as Submaster
If the controller is setup as a submaster, you are prompted to
select a communications option.
The three options are:
•
Radio/Wire
•
Phone- supports cellular and Ethernet
communications
•
Trunk
You are also prompted to enter an "address" for the controller.
The address is a unique identification number for the controller.
Each submaster under Central Control must have a separate
address.
Refer to the configuration procedure in Chapter 4: Setup.
After the address is assigned, the base menu is modified to show
the address of the controller.
For example, if address 2 is selected, the base menu displays:
FRI 02:11:33PM SATELLITE ADDRESS
05/17/96 WK1 |F1|=MAIN MENU |½|
002-00
Figure 134: Satellite Address Display
Note:
Page 154
The base menu display alternates every seven
seconds between the satellite address data and the
valid programs display.
Chapter 9: Central Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Transferring Programs between the Central Control
Computer and Submaster/Satellite Controllers
The purpose of Central Control is to have a single unit, the host
computer, provide program information to all Evolution DX2
controllers connected to it. The Central Control Computer also
monitors all controllers for possible field related problems and
maintains complete water usage and maintenance accountability.
The process of sending program information from the Central
Control Computer to the controllers is called "downloading."
Downloading is automatic when a controller is properly setup
and connected to the Central Control Computer. No action on
your part is necessary; all actions are handled by the Central
Control Computer.
Programs downloaded from the Central Control Computer may
be modified in the field at the local controller. To communicate
any program modifications to the Central Control Computer, you
must "upload" the new program.
To initiate an upload process from the base screen, follow these
steps:
Upload Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Modify Program Options menu as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F1=Program
F1=Modify Program
Enter Program #
P # |F1|=PROGRAM START |F2|=WATER DAYS
|F3|=STATIONS|F4|=PERCENT|F5|=SEND |½|
Figure 135: Modify Program
Note:
Program Number entry must be between 1 and 12.
Chapter 9: Central Control
Page 155
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 2
DX2 User Manual
Select F5=SEND. The following message is
displayed:
P # PROGRAM UPLOAD REQUEST
|½|
Figure 136: Program Send
The display indicates a program upload is requested.
In addition, an entry is made in the warning list.
When the Central Control Computer contacts the
controller, the program is uploaded and the entry is
cleared from the warning list. The time required
before the upload is made depends upon a number of
factors including the total number of controllers
operated by the Central Control Computer,
communications resources (such as an available
telephone line) for the upload, and the configuration
of the Central Control System.
Page 156
Chapter 9: Central Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Communications and Problem Reporting
Submaster
If the submaster loses communications with one of its hardwired
satellites, a hardwire (HW) communications failure is detected.
An entry is made in the submaster's warning list.
Example: Hardwire Warning entry
WARNING-HW COMM FAIL
05/17/96
2:55PM
Figure 137: Warning Report
Satellite
When a satellite loses hardwire communications, it is "off-line".
When communications is re-established, it is "on-line". When a
satellite becomes off-line or on-line, an entry is made in the
satellite's warning list.
Example: Off-line Warning entry
WARNING=OFF LINE 05/15/96
6:20PM
Figure 138: Problem Off-Line
Chapter 9: Central Control
Page 157
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Example: On-line Warning entry
WARNING=ON LINE
05/15/96
6:22PM
Figure 139: Problem On-Line
Note:
For detailed information on these warnings, refer to
All warnings are systematically retrieved and recorded by the
Central Control Computer. The reported warnings are listed on
the computer screen with full descriptions and recommended
corrective action for each warning.
Diagnostics
Inherent to the Evolution DX2 controller are several advanced
tools for communications troubleshooting. These tools are used
by RMIS service personnel to diagnose and correct field
communications problems.
The COMM Status options are reserved for use by RMIS field
service personnel.
Controller Logs
When a controller is operated in Central Control Mode,
controller operations data is stored on the controller. The data is
transferred automatically on command by the Central Control
Computer.
Data logged includes all station start and stop times and flow
totals. This data is automatically cleared from the satellite each
time statistics are uploaded.
Page 158
Chapter 9: Central Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Weather Center Sensors
Weather Center installations are connected to one specific
satellite controller covering a microclimate zone of an irrigation
system. The sensors of a Weather Center are identified as
follows:
•
ET (EvapoTranspiration) – Calculated by a Weather
Computer
•
Rain Fall - Rain accumulation is measured by Tipping
Bucket Rain Gauge
•
Wind - Wind speed is measured by an anemometer
All data gathered at the controller is reported back to the Central
Control Computer and stored in its database. This information is
used by the Central Control System to adjust irrigation control
base on weather conditions as reported. Current daily E.T., wind
and rain fall data can also be observed directly at the satellite
controller.
Specific review procedures are given in the Measurements
section of Chapter 7: System Status, page 7-4.
Full details on Central Control using a Weather Center are
provided in the Weather Center User Manual.
Figure 9-7: Weather Center Connections shows the physical
connections between a station and the controller.
Chapter 9: Central Control
Page 159
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Figure 140: Weather Center Connections
Page 160
Chapter 9: Central Control
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Chapter 10
Field Maintenance Activity and
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the resources available to maintain and
troubleshoot field wiring problems, broken heads, pipes and
mainlines, AC power problems, monitoring of water usage, and
miscellaneous other items.
In order to take full advantage of all the capabilities of the
Evolution DX2 controller as a maintenance tool, refer to the
following manual sections for operational information and
proper setup:
Flow monitoring:
•
Appendix A: Single controller with one point of
connection
OR
•
Appendix E: Multiple controllers sharing one point of
connection
Broken field wiring, short circuits, and faulty valve
solenoids:
•
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Appendix C: Power Failure/Recovery (no
special setup required)
Communications wiring issues:
•
Chapter 9: Communications and Problem
reporting (no special setup required)
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Chapter 10:
•
Troubleshooting
AC Power input problems:
Page 161
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Warning Report (Alarms)
The Evolution DX2 series controller has the ability to
automatically notify the operator when problems occur, or
certain conditions arise.
The mechanism used is known as the warning report. The
Evolution DX2 controller may report on over 30 different
conditions. Each condition is date/time stamped and includes
additional information which may be helpful in troubleshooting
the problem. Up to 15 warnings may be saved in the controller
at one time. The user may delete the list of warnings at any time.
Because the controller operates intelligently, immediate operator
attention to alarms/warnings is not necessary. For example,
consider a station with a broken head (FLOW UPPER LIMIT
warning). Upon detection of this failure, the Evolution DX2
will:
•
Turn the failed station off
•
Advance to the next scheduled station in the program
•
Mark this station as condemned (will not water again
until the alarm/warning is cleared)
•
Report the failed station as a warning
Upon review of the warning, maintenance personnel would
repair the problem and then clear the warning at the controller
(this re-enables all irrigation at the station).
Page 162
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Viewing the Warning List
Any time that a warning is generated by the controller, the base
screen displays the F 2 =WARNING message as illustrated in
the following base menu display:
WED 02:10:57PM VALID PGM: 1
06/05/96 WK1
|F1|=MAIN MENU |F2|=WARNING
Figure 141: Base Screen
Selecting the F2=WARNING displays the first problem in the
list.
Press the Down Arrow to display additional problems, if any.
Press the Up Arrow to display problems previously listed, if any,
and to move to the base screen.
After the last problem, press F1 =CLEAR REPORT
MESSAGES to Clear Report Messages. All problems in the list
are erased.
Warning:
Pressing the F1 key deletes all messages from
the list. The messages cannot be recovered. Do
not select F1 if you wish to continue reviewing
the current list of problems.
Press QUIT to return to the base menu.
The remainder of this chapter provides detailed information
about each warning, possible causes, and most important, the
recommended actions for problem solutions.
Note:
The following warning illustrations include a
numbering system (001-032) which corresponds to
the warning number sequence generated in the
Central Control Computer. This numbering system
may be disregarded in installations that do not
include a Central Control Computer.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 163
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Warning Display List
Standard Warnings
Page
Warning = 001 -Flow Lower Limit……...….……....
Warning = 002 -Flow Upper Limit…………………
Warning = 003 -Water Limit………………………..
Warning = 004 -Current Upper Limit……………....
Warning = 005 -Current Low Limit………………....
Warning = 006 -Main Flow…………………………
Warning = 007 -Hourly Rain Limit………………....
Warning = 008 -On Line………………………...….
Warning = 009 -Off line…..………………………...
Warning = 010 -Hardwire Communication Failure...
Warning = 011 -Wind Lower Limit………………..
Warning = 012 -Wind Upper Limit……….………..
Warning = 013 -Power Failure………………..........
Warning = 014 -Power On……………..………..….
Warning = 015 -Upload Request……………….…..
Warning = 016 -Unscheduled Limit………………...
Warning = 017 -Daily Rain Limit……..…….….…..
Warning = 018 -Short Circuit…………………….…
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
Page 164
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Warnings
Page
Warning = 019 - FM Flow Low Limit……..……........
Warning = 020 - FM Flow Upper Limit……….……...
Warning = 021 - FM Multiple Flow Meter 1 Assign….
Warning = 022 - FM Multiple Flow Meter 2 Assign….
Warning = 023 - FM Multiple Pump Assignment…….
Warning = 024 - FM Multiple MV1 Assignment..……
Warning = 025 - FM Multiple MV2 Assignment………
Warning = 026 - FM Multiple N.O. Assignment……...
Warning = 027 - FM Station Advance .……………….
Warning = 028 - FM Stop Water…………………….…
Warning = 029 - Auto Limits Aborted..….……...........
Warning = 030 - FM Hardwire Comm Failure………..
Warning = 031 - FM Communications Restored……...
Warning = 032 - FM Main Flow…………..….……….
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-30
10-31
10-32
10-33
10-34
10-35
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 165
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Standard Flow Warnings
001 - Station Flow Too Low
WARNING = FLOW LOW LIMIT 06/20/96 10:45AM
STA=2, MV1
GPM=12 |¾||½|
Figure 142: Warning 001 -Flow Lower Limit
This warning appears at any controller whenever the measured
flow is less than the expected flow (lower limit failure). The
warning displays the station number (2) which was on at the time
of the lower limit violation, the Master Valve (MV1) and/or the
Pump, as well as the GPM reading (12) as measured by the flow
meter. Upon detection, the controller automatically terminates
irrigation on the station and advances to the next station in the
program. Condemned stations will not irrigate again until the
warning has been cleared.
Action:
Step 1
Alarm generation may be caused by:
a. Mis-adjusted valve
b. Incorrectly established individual station limits
c. Large variations in static water pressure
d. Improper regulation
e. Line impediments
Step 2
If station limits are suspected, manually turn each
station on and observe the nominal GPM readings.
To isolate the suspect station, refer to the Manual
Test procedure, (8-2).
Step 3
Compare the GPM reading with the limit setting to
insure that adequate margin exits (typical: 50%
below nominal).
Page 166
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 4
DX2 User Manual
IMPORTANT: Upon resolution of problem,
CLEAR all warnings at the controller.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 167
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
002 - Station Flow Too High
WARNING = FLOW UP LIMIT 06/20/96
STA=2, MV1
GPM=90
10:45AM
|¾||½|
Figure 143: Warning 002-Flow Upper Limit
This warning appears at any controller whenever the measured
flow is more than the expected flow (upper limit failure). The
warning displays the station number (2) which was on at the time
of the upper limit violation, the Master Valve (MV1) and/or
Pump, as well as the GPM reading (90) as measured by the flow
meter. Upon detection of this condition, the controller
automatically terminates irrigation on the station and advances to
the next station in the program. Condemned stations will not
irrigate again until the warning has been cleared.
Action:
Step 1
Check for:
a. Stuck valve (from previous station)
b. Broken pipes/heads
c. Incorrectly established individual station limits
d. Large variations in system water pressure
Step 2
If station limits are suspected, manually turn each
station on and observe the nominal GPM readings.
To manually turn on a station and read the flow,
refer to the Manual Test procedure, (8-2)
Step 3
Compare the GPM reading with the limit setting to
insure that adequate margin exits (typical: 20% over
nominal)
Page 168
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Nominal
50
80
100
Step 4
DX2 User Manual
Upper Limit
60
96
120
IMPORTANT: Upon resolution of problem,
CLEAR all warnings at the controller.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 169
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
003 - Monthly Water Limit Violation
WARNING = WATER LIMIT
STA=1,
06/20/96 09:05PM
|¾||½|
Figure 144: Warning 003-Water Limit
The controller has exceeded its monthly watering allocation. If
the program has been set up to stop watering, no further
irrigation will occur until day one of the next month. If the
program has been set up to provide a warning only, and the
alarm is cleared, then this warning will re-appear (watering
continues).
When the option is set to "Stop Watering" and the limit is
reached, the following action indicates how the warning can be
circumvented so that irrigation may continue:
Action:
Step 1 The limit can be increased at the controller
by entering:
F1=MAIN MENU
F5=SETUP
F4=CONTROLLER
F1=FLOW OPTIONS
F1=MONTHLY LIMIT
Then enter a new monthly limit: OR
Step 2 The limit may be set to NONE, at the controller by
entering:
Page 170
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1=MAIN MENU
F5=SETUP
F4=CONTROLLER
F1=FLOW OPTIONS
F1=MONTHLY LIMIT
Select F1=NONE to disable monthly water total
validation.
Step 3
IMPORTANT: Upon resolution of problem,
CLEAR all warnings at the controller.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 171
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
004 - Station Electrical Current Too High
WARNING = I UP LIMIT
STA=17, MV1
06/20/96
02:42PM
I=0.40
|¾||½|
Figure 145: Warning 004-Current Upper Limit
The measured current upper limit value of electrical current is
greater than the established limits. The warning lists the station
number (17) which was on at the time of the upper limit
violation, the Master Valve (MV1) and/or PUMP, as well as the
measured electrical current in amps (.4). The current reading is
the total or sum of all outputs which are on, including any
Master Valve or Pump. Upon detection of this condition, the
controller automatically terminates irrigation on the station and
advances to the next station in the program. Condemned stations
will not irrigate until the warning has been cleared.
Action:
Step 1
Check field wiring for:
a. Faulty solenoid
b. Field wiring which is exposed and submerged in
water
c. Station to earth ground and/or common
resistance path
d. Improper station limits
Step 2
If station limits are suspected, manually turn each
station on and observe the measured amperage
(electrical current) in the display area I=X.XX. To
assist in the isolation of the faulty station, refer to
Multi-Station Diagnostics procedure.
Step 3
Compare the amperage reading with the limit setting
to insure that adequate margin exits (typical: 20%
over nominal).
Page 172
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 4
DX2 User Manual
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the controller.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 173
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
005 - Station Electrical Current Too Low
WARNING = I LOW LIMIT
06/20/96
03:15PM
STA=5
I=0.00
|¾||½|
Figure 146: Warning 005-Current Low Limit
The measured current lower limit value of electrical current is
less than the established limits. The warning lists the station
number (5) which was on at the time of the lower limit violation,
the Master Valve and/or Pump, as well as the measured electrical
current in amps (0.00). The current reading is the total or sum of
all outputs which are on. Upon detection of this condition, the
controller automatically terminates irrigation on the station and
advances to the next station in the program. Condemned stations
will not irrigate again until the warning has been cleared.
Action:
Step 1
Check field wiring for:
a. Faulty solenoid (open coil)
b. No station connection at terminal output board
c. Improper field wire connections at valve solenoid
d. Poor common connection in field wiring
e. Improper station limits
Step 2
If station limits are suspected, manually turn each
station on and observe the measured amperage
(electrical current) in the display area I=X.XX.
(Refer to Multi-Station Diagnostics procedure.)
Step 3
Compare the amperage reading with the limit setting
to insure that adequate margin exists (typical: 50%
under nominal).
Page 174
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 4
DX2 User Manual
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the controller.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 175
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
006 - Controller Main Line Break Occurred
WARNING = MAIN FLOW (MV)
06/20/96 10:46PM
STA=7, MV1
GPM=220
|¾||½|
Figure 147: Warning 006-Main Flow
The maximum main line break flow rate was exceeded for the
controller. The warning lists the station number (7) which was
on at the time the controller Main Line Limit failure occurred as
well as the measured flow in GPM (220). All irrigation for the
controller is immediately terminated. In addition, the Normally
Open Master Valve terminal (N.O.) is energized with 24 VAC.
Any and all future automatic irrigation will not occur until this
warning is cleared from the controller.
Action:
Step 1
Inspect the main line as well as major branches for
failure.
Step 2
Inspect the station(s) which were operating at the
time of the failure.
Step 3
Turn on the station by using the Manual Test
function, and observe the flow in GPM.
Step 4
Compare the measured flow rate with the station
limits as well as the controller Main Line Limit and
verify proper operation. The Main Line Limit
should be larger than the total of all simultaneously
"On" stations.
Step 5
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the controller.
Page 176
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
007 - Hourly Rain Limit Was Exceeded
WARNING = RAIN LIMIT- HR
.07 INCH
06/21/96 12:46PM
|¾||½|
Figure 148: Warning 007-Hourly Rain Limit
The hourly rain limit has been reached. Upon receipt of this
alarm condition, the Central Control System automatically places
all satellites for the associated microclimate into the rain
shutdown mode (if enabled). Rain shutdown affects all
programs which have been set up as irrigation programs. If any
irrigation programs are running, they are immediately
terminated. The satellite display area will be updated to indicate
that the satellite is in the rain shutdown mode. Programs
scheduled for the future will not start. The satellites remain in
the rain shutdown mode until the Central Control user decides it
is time to resume irrigation (automatic mode). The hourly limit
can be modified/reviewed at the Central Control Computer only.
Non irrigation programs will not be affected by the rain
shutdown mode.
Action:
None. This feature is only applicable to Central
Control Systems.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 177
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
008 - Hardwire Communications Restored (On Line)
WARNING = ON LINE
03/20/93
04:36PM
|¾||½|
Figure 149: Warning 008-On Line
A satellite has restored hardwire communications with its
submaster. Upon restoration of communications, the satellite
displays its address in the LCD display area. This message is
only applicable when the satellite is using a hardwire
communications line between itself and the submaster. This
warning may be preceded by an OFFLINE warning which
indicates when the hardwire communications were lost.
Note:
The submaster automatically attempts to initiate as
well as maintain hardwire communications at all
times.
Action:
Step 1
Page 178
Clear the warning at the satellite.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
009 - Off Line
WARNING = OFF LINE
03/20/93 04:30PM
|¾||½|
Figure 150: Warning 009-Off line
A satellite has lost hardwire communications with its submaster.
Hardwire communications occur between the submaster and its
satellites at the rate of once every 0.1 seconds. Loss of
communications may be temporary (power glitch) or permanent
(severed EV-CAB-COM communications cable). In either case,
irrigation will continue at the satellites without interruption as
long as the configuration does not utilize the Flow Max feature.
This message will be accompanied by a corresponding message
at its submaster, "HW COMM FAILURE."
Action:
Step 1
Hardwire communications failures may be caused by
any of the following: power failures, improper
hardwire connections at the communications board,
or broken/severed communications cable.
Step 2
Starting with the first satellite which is connected to
the submaster, examine the satellite address to verify
address XX-01 appears in the LCD display. If there
is no address and the controller is on, then a problem
related to the communications cable or its
connections has occurred somewhere between the
submaster and this unit. If the address is OK,
examine the satellite warning list for any related
warning messages, e.g. momentary power failure. If
address is OK and there are no related warnings,
proceed to the next satellite and troubleshoot as
above. Because the communications cable is wired
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 179
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
to each satellite in series, cable problems are isolated
quickly.
If the previous satellite's address is OK but the
current satellite has no address, the problem lies
between the two units.
Step 3
Page 180
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
010 - Hardwire Communication Failure
WARNING = HW COMM FAIL
03/20/93 04:30PM
|¾||½|
Figure 151: Warning 010-Hardwire Communication Failure
A submaster has lost hardwire communications comm. with one
or more satellites. Hardwire communications occur between the
submaster and its satellites at the rate of once every 0.1 seconds.
Loss of communications may be temporary (power glitch) or
permanent (severed EV-CAB-COM communications cable). In
either case, irrigation will continue at the satellites without
interruption as long as the configuration does not utilize the Flow
Max feature. This message will be accompanied by a
corresponding message at one or more satellites, "OFFLINE."
Action:
Step 1
Hardwire communications failures may be caused by
any of the following: power failures, improper
hardwire connections at the communications board,
or broken/severed communications cable.
Step 2
Starting with the first satellite which is connected to
the submaster examine the satellite address to verify
address XX-01 appears in the LCD display. If there
is no address and the controller is on, then a problem
related to the communications cable or its
connections has occurred somewhere between the
submaster and this unit. If the address is OK,
examine the satellite warning list for any related
warning messages, e.g. momentary power failure. If
address is OK and there are no related warnings,
proceed to the next satellite and troubleshoot as
above. Because the communications cable is wired
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 181
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
to each satellite in series, cable problems are isolated
quickly.
If the previous satellite's address is OK but the
current satellite has no address, the problem lies
between the two units.
Step 3
Page 182
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
011 - Wind Lower Limit Satisfied
WARNING = WIND LOW LIMIT
5 MPH FOR 2 MIN
06/21/93 02:30PM
|¾||½|
Figure 152: Warning 011-Wind Lower Limit
The lower wind limit condition has been satisfied. Upon receipt
of this alarm condition, the Central Control System
automatically removes all satellites from wind shutdown mode
(only those satellites within the confines of the wind
microclimate are affected). Once removed from wind shutdown mode, the satellite (s) resume any program execution by
enabling any station outputs which may be required.
Note:
Action:
Programs which were in wind shutdown mode are
not suspended in time. All programs continue to
run as normal with the exception that their outputs
(stations, MV's and Pump) are not active. Wind
limits can be modified and reviewed at the Central
Control Computer only.
None. This feature is only applicable to Central
Control Systems.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 183
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
012 - Wind Upper Limit Exceeded
WARNING = WIND UP LIMIT
22 MPH FOR 2 MIN
06/21/96
12:30PM
|¾||½|
Figure 153: Warning 012-Wind Upper Limit
The wind upper limit has been reached. Upon receipt of this
alarm condition, the Central Control System automatically places
all satellites into the wind shutdown mode (only those satellites
within the confines of the wind microclimate are affected).
Programs which are running at the time the satellite goes into
wind shutdown mode automatically turn all outputs off (stations,
Master Valves, Pumps, etc.). These programs however, continue
to advance in time and will resume if the wind lower limit
conditions have been met. Wind limits can be modified and
reviewed at the Central Control Computer only.
Action:
Page 184
None. This feature is only applicable to Central
Control Systems.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
013 - Power Failure
WARNING = POWER FAILURE
01/01/92 08:30PM
|¾||½|
Figure 154: Warning 013-Power Failure
The AC power to the controller has been lost. Power failures
may occur due to any of the following:
•
•
•
Turning the AC switch off at the controller
Power glitches or outages from the power company
Improper AC connections at the controller or main
distribution point
Action:
Step 1
Infrequent minor interruptions in power from the
power company may be a common occurrence, and
therefore no action is required.
Step 2
If power interruptions occur frequently, (several
times per week) it may be indicative of an improper
AC wiring connection to the controller, or improper
service from the power company.
Step 3
If power is out for an extended time, then the user
may wish to schedule supplemental irrigation.
Step 4
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 185
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
014 - Power Restoration
WARNING = POWER ON
01/01/92
08:30PM
|¾||½|
Figure 155: Warning 014-Power On
The AC power to the controller has been returned. This alarm is
automatically generated by the controller upon detection of its
AC input power.
Action:
Step 1
Page 186
Clear the warning at the controller.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
015 - Program Upload Request
WARNING = PROGRAM UPLOAD 10/30/96 04:21PM
PGM=5 |¾||½|
Figure 156: Warning 015-Upload Request
The user has requested the Central Control System to upload a
specific program.
"PGM=" designates the program number.
Warning:
Action:
Uploading a program from the satellite to Central
Control System should not be performed if the
user is utilizing BASIC ET at this satellite. An
upload in this instance would overwrite the
BASE schedule at central with a field satellite
program which has adjusted ET runtimes.
None. This feature is only applicable to Central
Systems.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 187
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
016 - Unscheduled Flow
WARNING = UNSCHEDULED LIMIT 08/27/92 12:05AM
GPM=40 |¾||½|
Figure 157: Warning 016-Unscheduled Limit
Flow was detected but the controller had no programs or manual
stations running. The flow sensor however recorded unexpected
flow "GPM=40." The controller will energize the N.O. Master
Valve output. All future scheduled irrigation will be inhibited
until this alarm has been cleared at the controller.
Action:
Step 1
Check for leaks, broken pipe(s), or physical damage.
Step 2
It is possible that a stuck valve from a previous
scheduled irrigation caused the failure. Check for
stuck valves.
Step 3
It is possible that the limit has been improperly
established. If quick coupling devices were on at the
time the alarm occurred, insure that there are enough
margins for the unscheduled flow limit. Refer to
section of Unscheduled Flow Limit.
Step 4
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Page 188
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
017 - Daily Rain Limit Reached
WARNING = RAIN LIMIT- DAY
0.16 INCH
06/21/96 12:05PM
|¾||½|
Figure 158: Warning 017-Daily Rain Limit
The daily rain limit has been reached. Upon receipt of this alarm
condition, the Central Control System automatically places all
satellites for the associated microclimate into the rain shutdown
mode (if enabled). Rain shutdown affects all programs which
have been set up as irrigation programs. If any irrigation
programs are running, they are immediately terminated. The
satellite display area will be updated to indicate that the satellite
is in the rain shutdown mode. Programs scheduled for the future
will not start. The satellites remain in the rain shutdown mode
until the Central Control user decides it is time to resume
irrigation (automatic mode). Rain limits can be modified and
reviewed at the Central Control Computer only. Non irrigation
programs will not be affected by the rain shutdown mode.
Action:
None. This feature is only applicable to Central
Control Systems.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 189
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
018 - Short Circuit
WARNING = SHORT CIRCUIT
STA = PUMP, MV1, 1
06/20/96
05:15PM
|¾||½|
Figure 159: Warning 018-Short Circuit
A short circuit problem was detected on a station or device. The
warning screen displays the stations and devices that were on at
the time of short circuit detection. This alarm will occur whether
or not station limits have been enabled or disabled. Upon
detection, the controller immediately turns the station(s) off and
advances to the next station in the program. This insures that no
physical damage occurs to the controller by drawing too much
current.
Action:
Step 1
Too much current for a station is caused by improper
field wiring or valve solenoid failure.
a. Examine the station field wiring and look for an
inadvertent connection from the station field
wire directly to the controller common
b. Look for a direct connection from the station
field wire to earth ground
c. Look for a shorted solenoid in the valve
d. For warnings displaying multiple stations,
identify the defective station/device using the
Multi-Station Diagnostics procedure
Step 2
Page 190
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Warnings
019 - Flow Max - Flow Lower Limit Violation
WARNING = FM FLOW LO LIM
05/30/96 04:45PM
SAT = 1, 4, 5
GPM=90
|¾||½|
Figure 160: Warning 019-FM Flow Low Limit
This warning appears FM flow lower limit at the submaster
whenever the measured flow is less than the expected flow
(lower limit failure). "SAT=" lists the address(es) of any
satellites which were irrigating at the time of the warning.
Example: Assume a submaster address of 35-00.
If the warning reads "SAT=1, 4, 5 GPM=90" then
each of the satellites 35-01, 35-04, 35-05 had one or
more stations which were on. Their combined
measured flow was 90 GPM which is less than the
programmed limit.
Action:
Step 1
Examine the warnings at the listed satellites to
determine which stations were on at the time of the
warning. Stations can be identified by viewing the
"FM STATION ADVANCE" warning at each of the
satellites.
Step 2
Alarm generation may be caused by mis-adjusted
valves, incorrectly established individual station
limits, large variations in static water pressure,
improper regulation, or line impediments.
Step 3
If station limits are suspected, manually turn each
station on and verify the lower limits. To manually
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 191
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
turn on a station and read the flow, refer to the
Manual Test procedure.
Step 4
Page 192
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of the problem, CLEAR all
warnings at all satellites. If warnings are not
cleared, the stations will remain off indefinitely.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
020 - Flow Max - Flow Upper Limit Violation
WARNING = FM FLOW UP LIM 05/30/96 04:45PM
SAT = 2, 5,
GPM=420 |¾||½|
Figure 161: Warning 020-FM Flow Upper Limit
This warning appears at the submaster whenever the measured
flow is more than the expected flow (upper limit failure).
"SAT=" lists the address(es) of any satellites which were
irrigating at the time of the warning.
Example: Assume a submaster address of 01-00. If the warning
reads "SAT=2,5 GPM=420" then satellites 01-02,
01-05 had irrigating stations and the sum of their
measured flow was 420 GPM.
Action:
Step 1
Examine the warnings at the listed satellites to
determine which stations were on at the time of the
warning. Each satellite will have an "FM STATION
ADVANCE" warning. This warning indicates
which stations were on at the time the submaster
detected the "FLOW UP LIM" violation.
Step 2
Check for:
a. Stuck valve (from previous station)
b. Broken pipes/heads
c. Incorrectly established individual station limits
d. Large variations in system water pressure
Step 3
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of the problem, CLEAR all
warnings at all satellites. If warnings are not
cleared, the stations will remain off indefinitely.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 193
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
021 - FM - Multiple Flow Sensor 1 Assignment
WARNING = MULTIPLE FM 1
06/14/96
11:45AM
|¾||½|
Figure 162: Warning 021-FM Multiple Flow Meter 1 Assign
This warning appears at the submaster whenever the Flow Max
feature has been incorrectly set up by the user. Using Flow Max,
it is possible to assign a device (in this case Flow Sensor 1) to
any of the Flow Max participants. If the user makes an error by
assigning the flow sensor to more than one satellite, this warning
will appear at the submaster. Devices must be installed at one
physical location (controller) only.
Action:
Step 1
Review the Flow Max device connection list at the
via the F4=REVIEW ALL selection. Look for two
or more occurrences of Flow Sensor 1 throughout
the Flow Max participants.
Step 2
Note the incorrect assignment and remove it from
the location(s), which are in error.
Example:
Assume a flow sensor physical connection at the
submaster (address 01-00) and an inadvertent
assignment of Flow Sensor 1 at participant address
01-02.
To remove the incorrect assignment, go to the
satellite address 01-02 (third controller on the
hardwire link) and delete the entry using the
Flow Max setup function.
Step 3
Page 194
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
022 - FM - Multiple Flow Sensor 2 Assignment
WARNING = MULTIPLE FM 2
06/14/96 11:45AM
|¾||½|
Figure 163: Warning 022-FM Multiple Flow Meter 2 Assign
This warning appears at the submaster whenever the Flow Max
feature has been incorrectly setup by the user. Using Flow Max,
it is possible to assign a device (in this case Flow Sensor 2) to
any of the Flow Max participants. If the flow sensor is assigned
to more than one satellite, this warning will appear at the
submaster. Devices must be installed at one physical location
(satellite) only.
Action:
Step 1
Review the Flow Max device connection list at the
submaster via the F4=REVIEW ALL selection.
Look for two or more occurrences of Flow Sensor 2
throughout the Flow Max participants.
Step 2
Note the incorrect assignment and remove it from
the location(s) which are in error.
Example:
Assume a flow sensor physical connection at the
submaster (address 01-00) and an inadvertent
assignment of Flow Sensor 2 at participant
address 01-03.
To remove the incorrect assignment, go to the
satellite address 01-03 (fourth controller on the
hardwire link) and delete the entry using the
Flow Max setup function.
Step 3
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 195
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
023 - FM - Multiple Pump Assignment
WARNING = MULTIPLE PUMP
06/14/96
11:30PM
|¾||½|
Figure 164: Warning 023-FM Multiple Pump
This warning appears at the submaster whenever the Flow Max
feature has been incorrectly set up by the user. Using Flow Max,
it is possible to assign a device (in this case the Pump) to any of
the Flow Max participants. If the Pump is assigned to more than
one controller, this warning will appear at the submaster.
Devices must be installed at one physical location (satellite)
only.
Action:
Step 1
Review the Flow Max device connection list at the
submaster via the F4=REVIEW ALL selection.
Look for two or more occurrences of the Pump
throughout the Flow Max participants.
Step 2
Note the incorrect assignment and remove it from
the location(s) which are in error.
Example:
Assume the pump's physical connection is at the
submaster (address 01-00) and the pump was
inadvertent assigned to the participant at address
01-03.
To correct this assignment, go to satellite
address 01-03 (fourth controller on the hardwire
link) and delete the entry using the Flow Max
setup function.
Page 196
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Step 3 IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at the
satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 197
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
024 - FM - Multiple Master Valve 1 Assignment
WARNING = MULTIPLE MV1
05/30/96
04:45PM
|¾||½|
Figure 165: Warning 024-FM Multiple MV1 Assignment
This warning appears at the submaster whenever the Flow Max
feature has been incorrectly set up by the user. Using Flow Max,
it is possible to assign a device (in this case Master Valve 1) to
any of the Flow Max participants. If Master Valve 1 is assigned
to more than one satellite, this warning will appear at the
submaster. Devices must be installed at one physical location
(controller) only.
Action:
Step 1
Step 2
Review the Flow Max device connection list at the
submaster via the F4=REVIEW ALL selection.
Look for two or more occurrences of Master Valve 1
throughout the Flow Max participants.
Note the incorrect assignment and remove it from
the location(s) which are in error.
Example:
Assume the Master Valve physical connection is
at submaster (address 01-00) and the Master
Valve was inadvertent assigned to participant
address 01-02.
To remove the incorrect assignment, go to the
satellite address 01-02 (third controller on the
hardwire link) and delete the entry using the
Flow Max setup function.
Step 3
Page 198
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
025 - FM - Multiple Master Valve 2 Assignment
WARNING = MULTIPLE MV2
06/03/96
06:45PM
|¾||½|
Figure 166: Warning 025-FM Multiple MV2 Assignment
This warning appears at the submaster whenever the Flow Max
feature has been incorrectly set up by the user. Using Flow Max,
it is possible to assign a device (in this case Master Valve 2) to
any of the Flow Max participants. If Master Valve 2 is assigned
to more than one satellite, this warning will appear at the
submaster. Devices must be installed at one physical location
(satellite) only.
Action:
Step 1
Review the Flow Max device connection list at the
submaster via the F4=REVIEW ALL selection.
Look for two or more occurrences of Master Valve 2
throughout the Flow Max participants.
Step 2
Note the incorrect assignment and remove it from
the location(s) which are in error.
Example:
Assume the Master Valve physical connection is
at submaster (address 01-00) and the Master
Valve was inadvertent assigned to participant
address 01-03.
To remove the incorrect assignment, go to the
satellite address 01-03 (fourth controller on the
hardwire link) and delete the entry using the
Flow Max setup function.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 199
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 3
Page 200
DX2 User Manual
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
026 - FM - Multiple Normally Open Master Valves
WARNING = MULTIPLE N.O.
06/03/96
06:45PM
|¾||½|
Figure 167: Warning 026 -FM Multiple N.O. Assignment
This warning appears at the submaster whenever the Flow Max
feature has been incorrectly set up by the user. Using Flow Max,
it is possible to assign a device (in this case the Normally Open
Master Valve) to any of the Flow Max participants. If the user
makes an error by assigning the N.O. MV to more than one
satellite, this warning will appear at the submaster. Devices
must be installed at one physical location (satellite) only.
Action:
Step 1
Review the Flow Max device connection list at the
submaster via the F4=REVIEW ALL selection.
Look for two or more occurrences of the N.O. MV
throughout the Flow Max participants.
Step 2
Note the incorrect assignment and remove it from
the location(s) which are in error.
Example:
Assume a N.O. MV physical connection is at
submaster (address 01-00) and the N.O. MV was
inadvertent assigned to participant address 0103.
To remove the incorrect assignment go to the
satellite address 01-03 (fourth controller on the
hardwire link) and delete the entry using the
Flow Max setup function.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 201
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 3
Page 202
DX2 User Manual
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all
warnings at the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
027 - Flow Max - Station Advance
WARNING = FM STA ADVANCE
STA= 1,
05/30/96 04:45PM
|¾||½|
Figure 168: Warning 027-FM Station Advance
This warning is issued to all Flow Max participants who have
stations on whenever either a FLOW UP LIM or a FLOW LO
LIM Warning (upper or lower limit failure) has occurred. The
"STA=" information indicates which stations were on at the time
the flow violation occurred. Upon receipt of this command, the
satellite will terminate irrigation for the listed stations and
automatically advance to the next station in the current program.
Future irrigation will not occur at the listed stations until this
alarm is CLEARED from the satellite/s.
Action:
Step 1
Review the Action information listed under the
FLOW UP LIM or the FLOW LO LIM warnings.
Step 2
Investigate individual station operation for listed
stations. (Refer to the Manual Test procedure)
Manually turn on each station individually and
visually inspect operation. Note the measured flow
readings and compare to both the upper and lower
limits which are set for this station. Check for any
broken or restricted heads, etc.
Step 3
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 203
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
028 - Flow Max - Stop Water
WARNING = FM STOP WATER
STA= PUMP, N.O., MV1,
06/14/96
10:45PM
|¾||½|
Figure 169: Warning 028 -FM Stop Water
This warning is originated by the submaster whenever flow
violations occur. It is sent to all Flow Max participants when
any of the following conditions occur:
• Unscheduled Flow
• Main Line Break
• Hardwire Communications Failure
• Power Failures
"STA=" indicates which stations were on at the time the
command was issued. Satellites which receive this warning
terminate all irrigation.
Action:
Step 1
Read the alarms at the submaster to determine the
reason for the alarm.
Step 2
Read the alarms at the satellites(s) for satellite
specific information.
Step 3
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
all satellites.
Page 204
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
029 - Auto Limits Aborted
WARNING = AUTO LIM ABORT
06/21/96
02:48PM
|¾||½|
Figure 170: Warning 029 -Auto Limits
The automatic calculation of the Auto Limits feature had to be
stopped due to a potentially hazardous over current situation at
this satellite. This warning only occurs when the Auto Limits
feature is running. This alarm may be preceded by a SHORT
CIRCUIT alarm, indicating the station with the short circuit
condition.
Action:
Step 1
Correct the short circuit (over current) condition at
the station. The problem station may be identified
by performing the Multi-Station Diagnostics
procedure.
Step 2
CLEAR all alarms.
Step 3
Re-run the AUTO LIMITS function.
Step 4
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 205
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
030 - FM - Communications Failure
WARNING = FM COMM FAIL
05/30/96 04:45PM
|¾||½|
Figure 171: Warning 030 -FM Hardwire Comm Failure
This warning is generated at the submaster when using the Flow
Max feature. It indicates that hardwire communications were
lost or interrupted between one or more satellites which are Flow
Max participants. The warning is immediately followed by a
STOP WATER warning. This means that all irrigation at the
time the communications failure occurred will be terminated.
Action:
Step 1
Hardwire communications failures may be caused by
any of the following:
• Power failures
• Improper hardwire connections at the
communications board of any Flow Max
participant
• Broken or severed communications cable
Step 2
Starting with the first satellite which is connected to
the submaster, examine the satellite address to verify
address XX-01 appears in the LCD display (Address
display should appear every seven seconds). If there
is no address and the controller is on, then a problem
related to the communications cable or its
connections has occurred somewhere between the
submaster and this unit.
If the address is OK, then examine the satellite
warning list to see if there are any related warning
messages, e.g. momentary power failure. If the
address is OK and there are no related warnings,
then proceed to the next satellite and troubleshoot as
Page 206
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
above. Because the communications cable is wired
to each satellite in a serial fashion, cable problems
are isolated quickly.
If the previous satellites address is OK but the
current satellite has no address, then the problem lies
between the two units.
Step 3
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 207
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
031- FM - Communications Restored
WARNING = COMM RESTORED
05/30/96 04:45PM
|¾||½|
Figure 172: Warning 031 -FM Communications Restored
This warning is issued after a previous Flow Max COMM FAIL
warning. It indicates that the submaster has been able to reestablish hardwire communications with all the participants of
the Flow Max link. Communications with all participants is
required in order for any program to execute.
Step 1:
Page 208
IMPORTANT:
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
032 - Flow Max - Main Flow
WARNING = FM MAIN FLOW
SAT=2, 5,
06/14/96 10:45AM
|¾||½|
Figure 173: Warning 032 -FM Main Flow
This alarm appears at the submaster whenever the measured flow
is more than the Main Line Break Limit established at the
submaster. It indicates that the sum of water from all Flow Max
participants exceeds the Main Line Break Limit. The submaster
automatically issues a STOP WATER warning to all
participants, to insure that all irrigation at every satellite
terminates. The NORMALLY OPEN MV terminal will be
automatically energized at the submaster as well as at the shared
location. IMPORTANT: All future scheduled irrigation for any
of the Flow Max participants will not occur until this alarm has
been cleared at the satellite.
"SAT=" lists the address(es) of any satellites which were
irrigating at the time of the warning.
Example:
Assume a submaster address of 01-00. If the warning
reads "SAT =2,5 GPM=620" THEN satellites 01-02, 0105 had irrigating stations and the sum of their measured
flow was 620 GPM.
Action:
Step 1
Review the warnings at the listed satellites to
determine which stations were on at the time of the
warning.
Determine if any of these stations were responsible
for the Main Line Limit failure.
Step 2
Inspect the main line as well as major branches for
failure.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 209
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Step 3
Inspect the station(s) which were operating at the
time of failure.
Step 4
Turn on the station using the MANUAL TEST
function, and observe the flow in GPM.
Step 5
Compare the measured flow rate with the station
limits as well as the satellite Main Line Limit and
verify proper operation. The Main Line Limit
should be larger than the total of all simultaneously
"On" stations.
Step 6
Upon resolution of problem, CLEAR all warnings at
the satellites.
Troubleshooting
The following flow charts offer methods of diagnosing and
correcting specific problems. Many of the resolutions refer to a
page or section in this manual to serve as additional steps in
solving the problem. The references are identified by chapter
and page number.
For further assistance please consult our Rain Master technical
support department at (805) 527-4498, Monday through Friday
during the hours of 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Pacific Time.
Warning:
Page 210
Before disconnecting ANY Evolution DX2 circuit
board, ensure that all power has been removed
from the system. Power can be removed by the
main power switch. Ensure that all cables have
been properly connected.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Directory of Flow Chart Diagnostic Problems
Problem/Symptom
Page
Automatic Program Does Not Start
10-38
Flow Sensor Reading Always Zero
10- 40
A Station/Valve Does Not Water
10-43
Display is Blank
10- 46
Controller Emits a Constant Tone
10-48
Program Starts-But Does Not Water
10- 49
Program Starts-But Stations Shut Off
Immediately- Diagnosis of Warnings
Monthly Flow Violation Occurred But Program
Still Operates
Multiple Stations Do Not Water (Many station
lights on)
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
10-50
10-51
10-54
Page 211
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Automatic Program Does Not Start
Start
1
Ref. (10-3)
Are there any warnings displayed?
Yes
Refer to warning list (10-4)
No
2
Does base screen
display show program is valid?
No
Review program – Ref (5-24)
- Proper start time,
- Proper water days,
- Verify 14 day, skip by day,
- 31 day cycle,
- Proper station run times?
Yes
3
Does base screen
display rain shutdown message?
Yes
Refer to rain shutdown (8-15)
Yes
Review program start time, water day and
check base screen time of day.
Refer to Review (5-24)
No
4
Does program start
using “Program On/Off”?
No
A
Page 212
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
A
5
Does base
screen display wind shutdown
message?
Yes
Refer to Wind shutdown (10-16)
Yes
Refer to Water Window (8-16)
No
6
Is there a
“No Water Window” defined?
No
7
Has an Omit By Date been
established?
Yes
Refer to Omit By Date to modify
exclusion (4-36)
No
8
Has the Program
Percent been set to zero percent?
Yes
Refer to Program Percent Setup (5-19)
No
9
Has a Moisture Sensor been set
up with this program?
Yes
Refer to Moisture Sensor Trip Point
(B-7)
No
Consult Factory
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 213
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Sensor Reading Always Zero
Start
1
Are Rain Master
K and Offset values set
correctly?
No
Reference Rain Master K and Offset
tables Appendix A
No
Check:
A – direction of flow sensor
B – continuity of EV-CAB-SEN cable
C – calibration if required
Ref. (A-22)
Ref. Appendix G
No
Does a manual valve need
to be opened?
Does a pump need to be turned on? Ref. (4-13), (811)
Does a master valve need to be turned on? Ref. (413), (8-11)
Yes
2
Is installation of flow sensor
correct?
Yes
3
4
Is water physically passing
through flow sensor?
Yes
Refer to (A-22)
Disconnect sensor wires from “Input 1+” and
“Input 1-“ terminals.
A
Page 214
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
A
5
Is there +8.0 VDC measured at
Inputs 1+ and 1- terminals?
6
No
Consult Factory
Yes
Refer to (A-22)
Re-connect sensor wires from “Input 1+” and
“Input 1-“ terminals.
7
Refer to (A-22)
Disconnect the EV-CAB-SEN wires from the flow sensor
Red & Black wires.
8
Is there +8.0 VDC measured at the
white & black EV-CAB-SEN
wires?
9
No
EV-CAB-SEN is defective. See
Appendix G for measuring continuity.
Yes
Insure all water is off
Drain line (relieve pressure)
B
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 215
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
B
Remove the sensor insert
10
Is debris impeding sensor
movement?
11
Remove debris
No
Replace defective sensor
Page 216
Yes
Re-insert sensor,
Connect wires,
Retest
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
A Station/Valve Does Not Water
Start
1
2
Ref. (10-3)
Are there warnings in base
screen display?
Yes
Refer to warning list (10-4) View and
take corrective action, then clear
warning
Yes
Refer to warning list (10-4) View and
take corrective action, then clear
warning
No
Using Manual Station function, turn suspect station
# on for 5 minutes.
Ref. (8-12)
3
Ref. (10-3)
Are there warnings
in base screen
display?
No
4
Turn controller power off and verify cable
connections are properly made from DX2 main
board to station output board.
Does station light
turn on for station indicated in
display?
Ref. (2-14)
No
If connections correct and station light does not turn
on, return station output board to factory for repair.
Yes
5
Is station
field wiring properly connected
at DX06 or DX012 station
output?
No
Ref. Station connection diagram (2-14)
Verify wiring and connections.
Yes
A
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 217
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
A
6
Is a master
valve or pump required to be
turned on for the station to
operate?
No
Yes
7
Is the MV
and/or pump light on?
No
Refer to master
valve/pump setup (413)
Set up program where
station
8
Yes
Isolate problem to field wiring/valve solenoid or controller
as follows:
Example: Station 1 works fine
Station 2 no water
At the station output board, inter-change the station wires
of the defective station (STA 4) with a known working
station (STA 1).
9
Ref. Manual Station (8-12)
Manually operate the known working station (STA 1) for
one minute.
B
Page 218
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
B
10
Does watering occur at field
zone for Station 4?
11
No
If field wiring OK, replace field
valve/solenoid
for defective zone.
Yes
At the station output board, change the wires
back to the original locations and try again.
End
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 219
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Display is Blank
Start
1
2
Is the contrast setting
too light?
Yes
Ref. (2-7)
Adjust Contrast Dark until display is at
desired level.
No
Verify AC Power switch
(inside controller) is in
the “On” position.
3
Verify the GFI circuit breaker is reset. Press
“Red” button to reset. Ref. (2-9)
4
Verify main circuit breaker at remote power
source is on.
5
Ref. (2-13)
Measure 12 volts AC across blue wire
terminals of
PCDX2-MV board.
A
Page 220
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
A
6
7
Is there
12 – 14 VAC
present?
No
Consult
Factory
Yes
Ref. (2-13)
Measure AC voltage across each end of Fuse
F1
Replace Fuse F1
(1 Amp)
8
9
Is there
12 – 14 VAC
present?
**
Yes
**This method checks the fuse without removing fuse.
A good fuse will not indicate a voltage since each end
is the same electrical point and would read virtually
zero 0 volts.
No
Verify cable connections (with AC power off)
from “PCDX2=MV” board to main circuit board.
Cable p/n 417-2100
Consult Factory
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 221
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Controller Emits a Constant Tone
Start
1
Are cable connections properly
made?
No
Turn controller Off.
Make all proper cable connections
and retry.
Yes
Consult Factory
Page 222
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Program Starts - But Does Not Water
Start
1
2
Does the
program require a master valve and/or
pump?
No
Refer to “A Station/Valve Does Not Water” (10-43)
Yes
Check master valve connections.
When program
starts, do the lights for the MV
and/or Pump turn on?
3
Yes
Ref. (2-14)
Verify master valve and/or pump have been
properly connected to the MV, Pump and COM
terminal of PCDX2-MV board.
No
Assign proper master valve to program ref.
(4-13)
Similarly for pump (4-14)
End
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 223
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Program Starts – But Stations Shut Off Immediately
Start
1
Have maximum
flow limits been exceeded?
Yes
Ref. Flow Limits (4-23) (A-4)
Verify flow limits for each station.
No
2
Have minimum
Flow limits been met?
No
Yes
3
Have maximum
Current limits been exceeded?
Yes
Reference:Current Limits
Verify current limits for each station.
No
B
A
Page 224
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
A
B
4
Have minimum
current limits
been me?
No
Yes
Consult Factory
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 225
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Monthly Flow Violation Occurred
but Program Still Operates
Start
1
Has the program been
set up to stop watering at water limit?
No
Ref. At Water Limit (4-13)
Change setup option from Give Warning to
Stop Watering
Yes
2
Has the upper limit checking of
station limits been disabled?
Yes
Ref. Station Setup (4-20)
To assure monthly flow violations are reported and acted
upon correctly, the upper limit checking must be enabled.
Change the limit options from Disabled to Enabled.
No
Consult Factory
Page 226
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Multiple Stations Do Not Water
Station LED for the suspect zone turns on
and other station LEDs also turn on.
The Evolution DX2 Controller has the unique ability to detect
and identify broken or missing "Common" valve solenoid wiring
connections.
If a zone does not water but that station's red LED light turns on
as well as other various LEDs for other stations, the field
"common" wire for those stations is not connected (floating) to
the controller.
Check the field wiring common connection at the controller and
at the field junction where they may be tied together. Check for
continuity of the common line from the controller to the field
valve.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 227
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The following schematic diagram illustrates a sample wiring
configuration of four solenoids connected to station outputs:
Controller Station Output Board
STA #10
Solenoid
STA #8
Solenoid
STA #4
Solenoid
STA #1
Solenoid
Figure 174: Output Board Station Connections
The solenoids connected to station outputs 1, 4, and 8 share one
common line return to the station output board. Station #10 is
shown as a normal operating station, which is connected
independently from the other stations (not sharing the common
connection).
When station one turns on, 24 VAC is applied to the solenoid
and the LED illuminates. If the common line is broken or open,
(as shown by the cross marks) current does not flow and the
solenoid is not energized. However, a small amount of current
flows through the solenoid coils back to each station output
LED. This causes station LEDs # 4 and #8 to illuminate,
creating the illusion that the stations are on when they are
actually inoperative.
Page 228
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This condition may be further complicated if the stations
associated with the common return line are located on another
station output board within the controller.
This condition is possible whenever groups of field valve wiring
configurations are tied together to one common return line.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 229
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Control Devices (Rain Sensors, Freeze sensors, Etc.)
Many commercial sensor devices available in today's market
take advantage of the common ground configuration to control
watering operations. Devices such as rain sensors, freeze
sensors, moisture sensors, etc. employ a control system which
interrupts the common ground line of watering stations to control
the shutdown of stations.
These devices have inherent limitations:
1) They exhibit "contact bounce" or jitter when the on/off
threshold is reached. This may have adverse affects on
pump systems.
2) Since they interrupt common lines, non-irrigation
programs such as lighting programs are also affected.
3) It may be difficult to identify/interrupt "the" common
wire if multiple commons come in from the field.
When connecting a common interrupting device to the Evolution
DX2 controller, certain conditions must be met prior to
installation to prevent the aforementioned problems. The Rain
Master custom interface cable kit provides the appropriate
method for connecting control devices with continued operation
integrity of the Evolution DX2 controller.
The interface kit is available (with full installation instructions)
at no charge through the Rain Master Order department under
part number "DXCID-KIT".
To request the interface kit, please contact Rain Master direct at
(805) 527-4498.
Page 230
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This page left intentionally blank.
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Page 231
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Appendix A
Flow Meters
The Evolution DX2 series controller provides a variety of userconfigurable, flow-related features for either one or two flow
sensors, referred to as Flow #1 and Flow #2.
The Evolution DX2 flow features/capabilities include:
Display of instantaneous flow rate in gallons per minute
(GPM) for Flow #1, Flow #2 and total (Flow #1 + Flow
#2). Flow rates are updated every ten seconds.
•
Display of monthly flow accumulations in gallons for
Flow #1, Flow #2 and total (Flow #1 + Flow #2). Flow
accumulation in gallons is updated every minute.
•
Automatic termination of watering based upon flow
limit violations:
o
Main line flow rate for controller (GPM)
o
Maximum flow rate per station (GPM)
o
Minimum flow rate per station (GPM)
o
Maximum flow accumulation per month
(gallons)
o
Unscheduled flow rate for controller (GPM)
•
Automatic condemnation and reporting of
stations violating flow limits. Warning
information is provided in the Field
Maintenance Activity and Troubleshooting
section of the manual.
•
Automatic establishment of station upper and
lower flow limits (learn mode).
Page 232
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Appendix: A
Flow Meters
•
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Meter Operation Overview
In order to display flow rate and/or flow accumulation data:
a. Insure flow sensor/meter has been properly connected
Refer to Flow Sensor Installation Instructions
b. Establish the appropriate flow calibration criteria, see
"Flow Meter Offset and K Values
In order to establish flow limit checking either on a controller or
individual station basis, verify the following:
c. Steps a and b (above) have been performed.
d. Station Upper Limits have been established, see "Max
Flow Limit".
e. Station Lower Limits have been established, see "Flow
Limit" page or "Auto Limits".
f.
Main flow limits have been established, (see "Main
Flow".
g. Total Monthly Flow has been set, see "Flow Options".
h. Unscheduled Flow Limit has been defined; see
"Unscheduled Flow Limit".
i.
The upper and lower limit checking is enabled; see
"Enable/Disable Limit Checking".
j.
The appropriate flow limit check delay has been
established, see "Delay Limit".
k. Selection of either one or two flow meters, see
"Flow Meter Compare Limits".
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 233
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Reading Accuracy
Since the Evolution DX2 controller has been designed to work
directly with flow sensors, the accuracy of the actual readings
are limited only by the flow sensor devices. Typical accuracy
values are approximately 1%.
Flow Meter Offset and K Values
Each flow meter installation must include entry of the "offset"
value and "K" values for proper calibration of the meter. Use the
following table to determine the appropriate values for your
installation.
Page 234
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
24
0
370
834
483
104
Slip
Slip
Slip
Slip
NPT female
NPT female with
copper male
adapters
NPT female
NPT female
NPT female
Requires pipe saddle with 2 Inch
female NPT
PVC
PVC
PVC
PVC
Bronze
32
0
Bronze
BODY
CONNECTION
MATERIAL TYPE
27
See attached table RMIS
Part No. 500712
400 PSI
Varies, Call
Factory
3 to 40 Inches
FS-INSERT-B
3752
100 PSI @
68º F
40-500 GPM
4 Inch
FS-400
2268
20-300 GPM
3 Inch
FS-300
100 PSI @
68º F
10-200 GPM
2 Inch
FS-200
776
5-100 GPM
1 ½ Inch
FS-150
750
100 PSI @
68º F
16-160 GPM
2 ½ Inch
FS-B250
200 PSI
291
457
10-100 GPM
2 Inch
FS-B200
400 PSI
209
100 PSI @
68º F
4-80 GPM
1 ½ Inch
FS-B150
400 PSI
109
1021
3-60 GPM
1 ¼ Inch
FS-B125
400 PSI
MAXIMUM
OFFSET
K VALUE
WATER
VALUE
PRESSURE
200 PSI
2-40 GPM
1 Inch
FS-B100
PIPE
SUGGESTED
FLOW SENSOR
CONNECTIO OPERATING
MODEL NO.
N SIZE
RANGE
RAIN MASTER FLOW SENSORS
SELECTION CHART
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Table 3: Calibration Table
Tee Mounted Sensors – Flow Sensors
Page 235
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Data Industrial Tee Mounted Sensors
Complete calibration tables for Tee mounted sensors are listed at
the end of this appendix.
Flow Limit Checking
To perform limit checking, the controller computes a GallonPer-Minute (GPM) flow rate based upon the total gallons used in
the previous 60 seconds.
Limit checks are then performed on the following:
•
Station upper limit
•
Station lower limit
•
Main flow limit
•
Total monthly flow limit
•
Unscheduled flow limit
Each station limit can be automatically established by the
controller or manually entered.
Details about each limit are given below.
Warning:
Limit checking is only performed when either the
upper and/or lower limits have been ENABLED.
Station Upper Limit
Enter an upper flow limit for the station, as described in Chapter
4. The controller compares the flow meter reading to the station
limit. If the meter value is larger than the limit, an error
condition is detected.
Page 236
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The suggested upper limit flow rate should be set to the nominal
flow rate for the station + 20%.
The system default value for upper station limit is 500 GPM.
Obtain the nominal flow rate from the controller display (see
Chapter 7, for the steps in displaying flow rate). You should
allow adequate "settling time" for the flow meter readings before
obtaining the nominal flow rate.
Upper station limits should be increased, if water pressure varies
greatly.
Station Lower Limit
Enter a lower flow limit for the station, as described in Chapter
4. The controller compares the flow meter reading to the station
limit. If the meter value is less than the limit, an error condition
is detected.
To detect a mis-adjusted valve or clogged line, enter a relatively
small (but non-zero) lower limit.
The system default value for lower station limit is 0 (zero) GPM.
Main Flow Limits
Enter the Main Flow Limit, as described in the Main Flow
procedure in Chapter 4. The controller compares the flow meter
reading to controller/main line station limit. If the meter value is
greater than the limit, an error condition is detected.
The system default value for controller/main line limits is 2000
GPM.
The Main Flow upper limit should be set higher than the total of
all simultaneously "on" stations. However, this limit should be
lower than the anticipated flow rate from a main line break.
In Flow Max systems, the total water consumption of all
participating controllers is calculated into the Main Flow limit.
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 237
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Total Monthly Flow Limit
Enter a maximum monthly flow limit, as described in Chapter 4.
The controller compares the accumulated monthly flow to
maximum monthly flow limit. If the accumulated flow is greater
than the limit, an error condition is detected.
The system default value for maximum monthly total is NONE.
When NONE is selected, no monthly flow checking is
performed.
If the monthly limit is exceeded, there are two options available,
STOP WATERING and GIVE WARNING. See Chapter 4:
Setup for details on selecting each option.
The system default is: GIVE WARNING.
If the stop watering option is selected, the problem is reported in
the warning list and watering stops.
Watering is restarted when:
• The limit is changed to a larger value
• The limit is changed to None
• A new month begins
If the Give Warning option is selected, a warning is reported in
the warning list and watering continues.
Unscheduled Flow Limit
Unscheduled Flow Limit is defined as any water flow that is not
programmed or under the control of the controller. If a water
flow is greater than the limit and no stations are on, the
controller will shut down the water supply until the condition is
corrected.
Unscheduled Flow conditions may be due to broken water lines,
defective valves, faulty solenoids and etc.
Page 238
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The Unscheduled Flow procedure is given in the Controller
Setup section of Chapter 4. The default limit is 200 GPM.
Enabling and Disabling Flow Limit Checking
Once the station limits have been established, the flow limit
checking (upper and lower limits) may be enabled or disabled.
When upper limits have been enabled, all station upper limits as
well as the monthly water limit will be validated. When lower
limits have been enabled, all station lower limits will be
validated on an individual station basis. See Chapter 4 for the
steps to enable or disable station flow limit checking.
The default setting for limit checking is DISABLED for all
stations.
When they are disabled, no limit checking is performed.
However, the GPM flow and total monthly flow readings are
unaffected.
Delaying Flow Rate Limit Checking
Due to drainage of water lines, the initial flow rate for a station
may be much higher than the station steady state condition. To
prevent erroneous station fault detections, the controller delays a
period of time after a station is turned on before making flow
rate limit checks. This delay may be set from 1 to 6 minutes.
The system default for delay of limit checking is two (2)
minutes.
To establish the proper delay, monitor the GPM flow rate for
each station in the irrigation program (s).
See Chapter 7 for details on monitoring GPM rates.
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 239
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Observe which station takes the longest time for its GPM rate to
"settle." Round this time period to the next minute and use this
rounded value as the flow rate limit check delay.
Warning:
Page 240
This delay value establishes the amount of time in
which a main or station line break can be detected
and subsequently shutdown.
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Limit Checking with Two Flow Meters
When two flow meters are used, you may select which meter is
used for limit checking. Alternately, you may check the total
flow from both meters.
See Chapter 4: Setup for details.
Flow Meter Reading
Procedure
To observe flow meter readings, from the base menu:
Step 1
Advance to the Measurements Options screen as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
F2=Measurements
|F1|=FLOW
|F2|=CURRENT
|F3|=MOISTURE |F4|=ET |F5|=RAIN/WIND |½|
Figure 175: Measurement Options
Step 2
Select F1=FLOW METER.
The meter flow readings for Flow #1 and Flow #2
are shown in Gallons-Per-Minute. Readings are
updated every 10 seconds.
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 241
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
FLOW #1 GPM=55
FLOW #2 GPM=150
DX2 User Manual
TOTAL GPM=205
|½|
Figure 176: Flow Meter Readings
Page 242
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Reading Monthly Water Totals
Procedure
To read the monthly water totals, from the base menu:
Step 1
Advance to the Status Options screen as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
|F1|=COMM STATUS
|F3|=WATER TOTAL
|F2|=MEASUREMENTS
|F4|=REVIEW ALL |½|
Figure 177: Status Options
Step 2
Select F3=WATER TOTAL then select
F1=TOTALS PAST MONTH.
FLOW #1 PAST
FLOW #2 PAST
G = 600
G = 300
TOTAL GPM=900
|½|
Figure 178: Water Total
The past month total gallons for Flow #1 and Flow
#2 are shown.
Step 3
Select F2=TOTALS PRESENT MONTH. The total
present month gallons for Flow #1 and Flow #2 are
shown.
To update the totals, press the Up Arrow key and
select F2 again.
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 243
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
When a Flow Limit Violation is Detected
Upon detection of a flow limit violation, Evolution DX2
performs the following actions:
1. Terminate Irrigation
•
For a faulty station, immediate termination of
irrigation for that station. The program will
automatically advance to the next station in the
program.
•
If a main line fault is detected, immediate
termination of all irrigation programs. The
Normally Open (N.O.) Master Valve terminal is
energized with 24 VAC. Any and all future
automatic irrigation will not occur until this warning
is cleared from the controller.
•
If the monthly watering allocation has been
exceeded, immediate termination of all irrigation on
a per program basis occurs.
•
If an unscheduled flow condition is detected, the
Normally Open (N.O.) Master Valve terminal is
energized with 24 VAC. Any and all future
automatic irrigation will not occur until this warning
is cleared from the controller.
2. Entry of the problem in the Warning/Report list.
3. All faulty stations are added to a "condemned" station
list. No watering will occur until the problem is
corrected.
To remove a station from the condemned list, delete the problem
entry from the warning report, see Chapter 10.
Page 244
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Limit Violation Examples
Overflow in Controller/Main Line Break
Assume the maximum controller flow rate is 500 GPM. A main
line break occurs while attempting to water station 7. The break
results in a flow of 750 GPM. The following warning message
is displayed, as well as the station number and GPM reading.
WARNING = MAIN FLOW (MV)
STA = 7, MV1,
5-20-96
11:48
GPM = 750
Figure 179: Warning, Main Flow
The MV1 in the second line represents the Master Valve #1.
To access the warning report, from the base menu, press
F2=WARNING.
Note:
Break between Flow Sensor and First Station.
Assume that a line breaks between the flow sensor and the first
valve. When the break occurs, no watering will take place. The
following entry would be placed in the warning list.
WARNING = UNSCHED LIMIT
GPM = 65
05/20/96
12:05
Figure 180: Warning, Unsched Limit
Note:
This situation may also be caused by a valve that
fails to close.
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 245
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Station Overflow
Assume station 2 has an upper limit of 300 GPM. A broken line
occurs, resulting in a 400 GPM flow. The following entry is
placed in the warning list.
WARNING = FLOW UP LIMIT
STA = 2, MV1,
05/20/96
GPM = 400
12:05
Figure 181: Warning, Flow Up Limit
Station Under Flow
Assume station 2 has a lower limit of 100 GPM. The line to
station 2 is clogged, resulting in a flow reading of 53 GPM. The
following entry is placed in the warning list.
WARNING = FLOW LOW LIMIT
STA = 2, MV1,
05/20/96
GPM = 53
1:35
Figure 182: Warning, Flow Low Limit
Monthly Water Limit Exceeded
The controller has exceeded its monthly watering allocation. The
Water Limit message is placed in the warning list.
WARNING = WATER LIMIT
STA =3, MV1,
05/20/96
1:35
Figure 183: Warning, Water Limit
Page 246
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This problem cannot be cleared from the report until the water
limit is set to a higher value or until a new month begins.
Multiple Stations with Non-Overlap Protection
The Evolution DX2 controller allows the user the capability of
turning "on" several stations simultaneously. When flow meters
are used in this environment, the individual station limits are
summed and compared to the total flow rate. Therefore, you
must set up limits for each station to insure that flow limit checks
are performed properly.
Example:
Assume the upper limit for station 1 is 80 GPM and the
upper limit for station 2 is 50 GPM. If both stations are
on, the controller adds these limits. A problem is
reported if the flow exceeds the total of 130 GPM (80
GPM + 50 GPM).
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 247
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Table 4: Rain Master K and Offset Value
Rain Master K and Offset Value For Data Industrial Flow Sensors
CALIBRATION TABLE – TEE MOUNTED SENSORS (Current Production)
Models) (Series: 228PV, 228 BR, 228 CB, 228 CS, 228SS, 250BR)
Data
Industrial
Model
Apparent
ID
Evolution
Satellite
K Value
Evolution
Satellite
Offset
Min
Design
Flow
(GPM)
Max
Design
Flow
(GPM)
228PV-1.5
228PV-2
228PV-3
228PV-4
1.50
1.94
4.02
5.15
457
776
2268
3752
0
104
483
834
5
10
20
40
100
200
300
500
228BR-2
228BR-2.5
1.99
2.52
750
1021
0
370
10
16
100
160
228CB-2
150 PSI Tee
400 PSI Tee
228CB-2.5
2.07
2.07
2.10
2.51
777
777
711
1021
199
199
167
265
12
12
12
16
120
120
120
160
228CS-2
2.07
767
199
12
120
228SS-2
1.99
750
0
10
100
250BR-0.5
250BR-0.75
250BR-1
250BR-1.25
250BR-1.5
None
None
1.05
1.38
1.61
92
119
109
209
291
8
64
27
32
24
0.8
1
2
3
4
8
10
40
60
80
Page 248
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
OBSOLETE OR OLDER MODEL FLOW SENSORS
(Series:
Data
Industrial
Model
220P-1
220P, 228B, 228CB, 250B, 228PF, 228PD, 228CS, 228SS, *IR220P, IR228B,
IR228CB, IR250B, IR228CS, IR228SS)
Apparent
ID
Evolution
Satellite
Offset
Min
Design
Flow
(GPM)
Max Design
Flow
(GPM)
Minimum
Recommended
Full Scale
(GPM)
70
25
2
20
5
505
107
8
180
40
744
273
13
250
50
2268
4191
483
975
35
65
700
1200
160
300
0.96/FM92D
1.50/FM92D
1.94/FM92D
70
26
2
20
5
505
107
8
180
40
744
273
13
250
50
228PF-1.5
228PF-2
228PF-3
228PF-4
228PF-6A
1.71
2.21
2.98
2.99
569
1075
1512
2814
279
185
841
1911
228B-2
1.99/FM92D
2.52
750
0
10
250
50
1022
370
16
400
75
2.07/FM92D
2.07/FM93A
2.10/FM91D
2.51
767
198
12
250
50
711
167
12
250
50
1021
265
16
400
75
228CS-2
2.07/FM92D, FM93A
767
198
12
250
50
228SS-2
1.99/FM92D
750
0
10
250
50
250B-1
1.05/FM93A
1.38/FM93A
1.61/FM93A
113
47
2
45
8
209
32
3
90
15
291
24
4
100
20
220P-1.5
220P-2
220P-3
220P-4A
220P-6A
228PD-1
228PD-1.5
228PD-2
228B-2.5
228CB-2
150 PSI
Tee
400 PSI
Tee
228CB-2.5
250B-1.25
250B-1.5
0.96/FM92D
1.50/FM92D
194/FM92D
4.02/Any
5.15/Any
Evolution
Satellite
K Value
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 249
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Rain Master K and Offset Value
For Data Industrial Flow Sensors
Pipe Size
Pipe
O.D. in
Inches
Pipe
I.D. in
Inches
Evolution
Satellite
K Value
Evolution
Satellite
Offset
Min.
Flow in
GPM
Min.
Flow in
GPM
for Full
Scale
3 inch Sch 10S
Std. Wt. Sch 40
Ex. Strong Sch 80
PVC Class 125
PVC Class 160
PVC Class 200
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.260
3.068
2.900
3.284
3.230
3.166
1368
1191
1053
1391
1338
1278
115
70
42
121
107
91
12
12
12
12
12
12
400
400
400
400
400
400
4 inch Sch 10S
Std. Wt. Sch 40
Ex. Strong Sch 80
PVC Class 125
PVC Class 160
PVC Class 200
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.260
4.026
3.826
4.224
4.072
4.072
2620
2277
2008
2565
2361
2342
592
489
354
577
554
525
20
20
20
20
20
20
600
600
600
600
600
600
5 inch 10S
Std. Wt. Sch 40
Ex. Strong Sch 80
5.563
5.50
5.50
5.295
5.047
4.813
4451
4006
3594
1044
932
829
30
30
30
900
900
900
6 inch 10S
Std. Wt. Sch 40
Ex. Strong Sch 80
PVC Class 125
PVC Class 160
PVC Class 200
6.625
6.5
6.5
6.625
6.625
6.625
6.357
6.065
5.761
6.217
6.115
5.993
6576
5890
5312
6239
5997
5752
1603
1419
1265
1509
1445
1381
50
50
50
50
50
50
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
8 inch Sch 10S
Sch 20
Sch 30
Std. Wt. Sch 40
Sch 60
Ex. Strong Sch 80
PVC Class 125
PVC Class 160
PVC Class 200
8.625
8.625
8.625
8.625
8.625
8.625
8.625
8.625
8.625
8.329
8.125
8.071
7.981
7.813
7.625
8.095
7.961
7.805
11989
11371
11210
10943
10453
9914
11281
10884
10429
3215
3018
2975
2884
2735
2566
2994
2868
2729
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
Page 250
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Rain Master K and Offset Value
For Data Industrial Flow Sensors
Pipe Size
Pipe
O.D. in
Inches
Pipe
I.D. in
Inches
Evolution
Satellite
K Value
Evolution
Satellite
Offset
Min.
Flow in
GPM
Min.
Flow in
GPM
for Full
Scale
10 inch Sch 10S
Sch 20
Sch 30
Std. Wt. Sch 40
Ex. Strong Sch
60
Sch 80
PVC Class 125
PVC Class 160
PVC Class 200
10.75
10.75
10.75
10.75
10.75
10.420
10.250
10.136
10.020
9.750
19163
18473
18037
17622
16657
5768
5509
5345
5187
4827
125
125
125
125
125
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
10.75
10.75
10.75
10.75
9.564
10.088
9.924
9.728
16010
17863
17273
16580
4594
5276
5054
4804
125
125
125
125
4000
4000
4000
4000
12 inch 10S
Sch 20
Sch 30
Std. Wt. Sch 40S
Sch 40
Sch 60
Extra Strong
Sch 80
PVC Class 125
PVC Class 160
PVC Class 200
12.75
12.75
12.75
12.75
12.75
12.75
12.74
12.75
12.75
12.75
12.75
12.390
12.250
12.090
12.000
11.938
11.625
11.750
11.376
11.966
11.770
11.538
28566
27997
27122
26638
26309
24690
25328
23457
26457
25430
24254
9831
9556
9156
8943
8783
8057
8336
7523
8857
8394
7869
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
14 inch 10S
Sch 20
Std. Wt. Sch 30
Sch 40
Sch 60
Extra Strong
Sch 80
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
13.500
13.375
13.250
13.124
12.814
13.00
12.50
33390
32819
32255
31694
30343
31149
29027
12242
11941
11645
11353
10699
9639
10041
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 251
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Rain Master K and Offset Value
For Data Industrial Flow Sensors
Pipe Size
Pipe
O.D. in
Inches
Pipe
I.D. in
Inches
Evolution
Satellite
K Value
Evolution
Satellite
Offset
Min.
Flow in
GPM
Min.
Flow in
GPM
for Full
Scale
16 inch 10S
Sch 20
Std. Wt. Sch 30
Ex. Strong Sch
40
Sch 60
Sch 80
16.00
16.00
16.00
16.00
15.500
15.375
15.250
15.000
43473
42791
42115
40785
17937
17495
17100
16331
300
300
300
300
9000
9000
9000
9000
16.00
16.00
14.688
14.314
39163
37278
15388
14332
300
300
9000
9000
18 inch Sch
10S
Sch 20
Sch 30
Std. Wt.
Sch 40
Sch 60
Extra Strong
Sch 80
18.00
17.500
55348
25847
350
10000
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
17.375
17.124
17.250
16.876
16.500
17.000
16.126
54553
52979
53765
51451
49187
52211
46997
25271
24145
24705
23110
21632
23599
20140
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
Page 252
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Figure 184: Flow Sensor Installation
Appendix A: Flow Meters
Page 253
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Appendix B
Current Monitor
The Evolution DX2 series controller provides the ability to
limit and view the controller's output current (Amps) usage.
Establishing limits allows detection of field wiring problems
associated with any station. Evolution DX2 current monitoring
features include:
•
Display of the total, instantaneous current on a per
station basis
•
Automatic termination of station output and reporting of
station status when the preset maximum current is
exceeded
•
Automatic termination of station output and reporting of
station status when current stays below the pre-set
minimum
•
Review of station status reports via the Warning/Alarm
display
•
Automatic current limit setup
The monitoring of current can be enabled or disabled.
Even if it is disabled, the controller ensures that the
maximum total current will not exceed 2 Amps. At
this point the controller may shut down.
Special test circuits automatically check and
calibrate the current monitor during start-up to
ensure optimum accuracy.
Page 254
Appendix: B
Current Monitor
Current Monitor Setup
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Warning:
DX2 User Manual
To properly monitor current levels:
•
•
•
You must enter minimum and
maximum current levels to be
monitored by the system.
When setting limits, the controller
automatically sums limits when
multiple stations and/or the Master
Valve are on. For example, assume
station 1 has a .2 Amps limit and the
Master Valve has a .4 Amps limit.
When both are on, the controller
adds (.2 Amps) + (.4 Amps) = .6
Amps. The measured value is then
compared to .6 Amps.
Current monitoring must be enabled.
Current Limit Detection
When a current limit is detected, the controller performs the
following actions:
1. If the limit is for a station, operation of the station is
immediately terminated.
2. The problem is listed as a warning/alarm.
3. The controller advances to the next station in the current
program (if applicable).
4. The station is entered in a "condemned" list. No
watering occurs for those stations in the "condemned
list" until the problem is corrected.
To remove a station from the bad list, delete the problem from
the warning report, refer to Chapter 10.
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Page 255
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Auto Limits Procedure
The Auto Limits feature establishes upper and lower limits of
current by automatically measuring each station. Upper and
lower percentages of the measured values are calculated to
establish the limits for each station.
The current upper default percentage is set at 20% above the
measured value; a .50 Amps measurement percentage value for
the upper limit would therefore be .60 Amps. The lower default
percentage is set at 50% below the measured value; a .50 Amps
measurement percentage value for the lower limit would
therefore be .25 Amps.
The default values may be changed at any time using the
F2=SET LIMIT(%) option. The percentage value ranges are
given on the percentage entry display screen.
Note:
Step 1
If the default values are not suitable for your
application, the SET LIMITS percentages must be
entered prior to running the Auto Limits. Select
F2=SET LIMIT and set your percentages
accordingly.
Advance to the Auto Limits Option display through
the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
F3=Auto Limits
|F1|=RUN AUTO LIMITS
|F2|=SET LIMIT ( % )
|½|
Figure 185: Auto Limits
Step 2
Page 256
Select F1=RUN AUTO LIMITS and verify the
following three option menu:
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
|F1|=FLOW ONLY |F2|=CURRENT ONLY
|F3|=BOTH FLOW AND CURRENT
|½|
Figure 186: Auto Limits
There are three options:
Step 3
•
Flow Only
•
Current Only
•
Both Flow and Current
Select F2=CURRENT ONLY and enter the station
number. The station number must be between 1 and
48. To measure all stations, enter station number 1,
and then press ENTER.
Note:
The maximum number of stations is determined by
the total stations installed in the satellite. The
maximum number (1-xx) will appear on the Station
Number Entry Display.
The following resultant display indicates the station
number, run-time count-down timer, station current
measurement (I) and flow measurement (GPM).
The upper and lower limits of current are
automatically calculated based on the measured
parameters.
The current measuring default time is 5 seconds for
each station. When the count-down clock runs
down, the station number will increment to the next
station and the measurement process is repeated.
With all stations completed, the display returns to
the Auto Limits Options menu. At this point, all
upper and lower percentage values are calculated.
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Page 257
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
AUTO LIM STA 1 0:02:00 I = 0.00 GPM = 0
|½|
Figure 187: Auto Limits
In addition to sequencing through all stations, MV1,
MV2 and the N.O. output currents are also
established.
Note:
The pump is not calculated and therefore should be
established by the user manually.
When completed, the Auto Limits Options menu
will be displayed.
Step 4
This completes the Auto Limits procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base screen.
Enabling and Disabling Current Checking
After maximum and/or minimum current limits are entered,
current checking (monitoring) must be enabled for upper and
lower limit detection.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Current Limit Options screen as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
F1=Enable/Disable
F2=Current
Page 258
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
|F1|=UPPER LIMIT |F2|=LOWER LIMIT
|½|
Figure 188: Current Limit Options
Step 2
Select Upper Limit. The limit checking status
(enabled or disabled) is displayed.
UPPER LIMIT CHECK: ENABLED
|F1|=CHANGE OPTION
|½|
Figure 189: Upper Limit Enable Option
Using the F1=CHANGE OPTION toggle key,
enable/disable the Upper Limit check.
Step 3
Press the Up Arrow and select the F2=LOWER
LIMIT.
Enable the Lower Limit check using the
F1=CHANGE OPTION toggle key.
If a limit check (upper or lower) is disabled, current
checking for that station is not performed and
condemnation and reporting of stations violating that
limit does not occur.
Station Current Limit Setup
The maximum current limit is used to detect shorted solenoid
wiring or a faulty solenoid. A minimum limit value, equal to
50% of the measured station current, is used to detect an open or
broken wire.
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Page 259
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Current Limit Setup Procedure:
Step 1
Advance to the Limit Options menu as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
|F1|=ENABLE/DISABLE LIMIT CHECKING
|F2|=LIMITS/TYPE |F3|=AUTO LIMITS
|½|
Figure 190: Limit Options
Step 2
Select F2=LIMITS/TYPE and enter the station
number. The station number must be between 1 and
48.
Note:
The maximum number of stations is determined by
the total stations configured in the satellite
controller. The maximum number will appear on
the Station Number Entry Display screen.
If the control output is for a Master Valve or Pump,
enter the appropriate number from the following
listing:
01
02
03
04
=
=
=
=
MV1
MV2
N.O. MV
Pump
Press the ENTER key.
Page 260
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 3
DX2 User Manual
Select F1=CURRENT LIMIT. The following screen
is displayed:
STATION # # MAX CURRENT LIMIT:
ENTER LIMIT ( 0.0 – 1.0 AMPS )
1.00
|½|
Figure 191: Current Limit Entry
The Station Number is displayed with a Max
Current value. If a Master Valve/Pump was entered,
it will be indicated as such in the station number
area.
Step 4
Enter the maximum current limit in Amps then press
ENTER. The limit must be between 0 (zero) and 1.0
Amps. The default maximum limit is 1.0 Amps.
The controller compares the station's AC current
consumption to the station maximum limit. If, after
the station is turned on, the measured current
consumption is larger than the limit, an error
condition is detected.
The suggested maximum current limit is 20% above
normal operating current consumption.
Step 5
Enter the minimum current limit in Amps. The limit
must be between 0 (zero) and 1.0 Amps. The default
minimum current limit is 0.05 Amps.
The controller compares the station's AC current
consumption to the station minimum limit. If, after
the station is turned on, the measured current
consumption is less than the limit, an error condition
is detected.
A value of 0 (zero) indicates the station is not
checked for minimum current violations.
The suggested minimum current limit is 50% of the
normal operating current consumption.
Enter a relatively small, non-zero minimum limit to
detect an open or broken wire. Press ENTER.
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Page 261
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Example Current Limit Violations
Station Consumes Too Much Current
Assume the maximum station current for station 7 is set to .60
Amps. While watering on Station 7 (no Pump, Master Valve or
other stations on) is in progress, .85 Amps of current are
detected. Watering is stopped on Station 7. The base menu will
now display F2=WARNING and an entry is made in the warning
list.
See "Maximum Controller Current" section for additional
details.
WARNING = I UP LIMIT 05/21/96
STA = 7
I=.85 AMPS
11:56
|½|
Figure 192: Warning, Up Limit
Station Consumes Too Little Current
Assume the minimum limit is set to 0.15 Amps. While watering
on Station 2 is in progress, 0.00 Amps is detected. Watering on
Station 2 is stopped. The base menu will now display
F2=WARNING and an entry is made in the warning list.
WARNING = I LOW LIMIT 08/21/95
STA = 2
I=.00 AMPS
12:06
|½|
Figure 193: Warning, Low Limit
Multiple Stations with Non-Overlap Protection
The Evolution DX2 controller allows several stations to be on
simultaneously. When current limit checking is used in this
Page 262
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
situation, the limit checked by the controller is the sum of the
individual station current limits.
Maximum Controller Current
The maximum rated current for any station or combination of
stations is 2.0 Amps. If four devices (field valve solenoid,
Master Valve, Pump, Relay, etc.) that each have current draw of
.50 Amps were on simultaneously, the current would be 2.0
Amps. This is equal to the maximum controller allowance.
Monitor individual station currents and program your stations
accordingly. If you are using older solenoids which draw more
than .50 Amps each, you may consider replacing them.
The controller protects itself in the event that the solenoids draw
more than the maximum allowable current. The associated
station will shut down and the following message will be
displayed:
WARNING = SHORT CIRCUIT
STA = PUMP, MV1, 1
06/20/96
05:15 PM
|½|
Figure 194: Short Circuit Warning
For further details on short circuit warning, refer to Chapter 10.
In addition to the built-in short circuit protection, a separate 24
VAC fuse exists (located on the Master Valve/Pump/Power
Assembly board).
In the rare event that the 24 VAC fuse should blow, the
controller has intelligence to detect the blown fuse and inform
the operator with the following message:
CHECK 24 VAC FUSE
Figure 195: Fuse Display Message
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Page 263
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The message will appear in the upper left corner over any given
display screen.
Page 264
Appendix B: Current Monitor
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Appendix C
Power Failure/Recovery
The Evolution DX2 controller contains non-volatile Random
Access Memory (RAM), which allows all user watering
schedules to be retained indefinitely in the event of power
failure. This data is retained without the use of replaceable
batteries. In addition, the controller has an internal clock which
keeps track of calendar time without the need for AC power.
Also, when AC power is lost or restored, the time and date of the
occurrence is logged. No special setup is required of the user to
take advantage of the power monitoring and recovery features.
Problem Reporting
Each power failure and recovery is reported on the
warning/alarm list.
If a problem occurs, the base menu display reads:
"WARNING=POWER FAILURE" or POWER ON, followed by
the time and date of the occurrence.
Appendix: C
Power Failure
See Chapter 10 in the viewing and clearing of the warning/alarm
list.
Appendix C: Power Failure/Recovery
Page 265
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Canceling and Continuing Watering Programs
When the power is lost and/or restored, the controller can be in
one of several possible states. Continuing with the program
depends on the duration of the scheduled watering time and the
length of the power outage.
Warning:
•
When a program is running, and the power is lost
and restored, the controller will enter a “catch-up”
cycle to re-establish which program and stations
to turn on, if any.
If no program is running and no stations are on, and
the power is restored prior to the program start time:
The program will start at its scheduled time.
•
If no program is running and power is out at the
normal start time:
The program will not start until the next scheduled
program start.
•
If a program is running and a station is on when the
power outage occurs, and the elapsed time of the
outage is greater than the scheduled run time of the
program:
The problem list will indicate which station(s) were on
at the time of the outage. Run time will not resume after
the outage, and the program will not start until it’s next
scheduled start time.
Page 266
Appendix C: Power Failure/Recovery
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
•
DX2 User Manual
If a program is running and a station is on when the
power outage occurs, and power is restored prior to
completion of the scheduled run time:
The program will continue its scheduled cycle, resuming
where it would have been if the outage had not occurred.
Example:
If a program was scheduled for 1:00PM to run
stations 1 and 2 for 10 minutes each, and an
outage occurred at 1:05 and restored at 1:12,
station 2 will come on for the 8 remaining
minutes of the schedule.
•
If the duration of the power outage is more than 24
hours:
No attempt is made to restart a watering program. This
only concerns a program that extends longer than 24
hours. All programs will start at their next scheduled
times.
Appendix C: Power Failure/Recovery
Page 267
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This page left intentionally blank.
Page 268
Appendix C: Power Failure/Recovery
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Appendix D
Access Codes
Access codes are used to restrict unauthorized access to
sensitive program data. There are two levels of access available,
level 1 and level 2. Both levels prevent creation, modification
and deletion of programs and ISCs, including setup data. In
addition, level 1 code prevents the user from using "manual
on/off" operations.
Entering an Access Code
Procedure:
Step 1
Advance to the Access Code Entry screen as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F3=User Option
F3=Access Code
ACCESS CODE:
ENTER ACCESS CODE
|½|
Step 2
Enter the access code. The access code
must be three digits. Press ENTER.
Appendix D: Access Codes
Appendix: D
Access Codes
Figure 196: Access Code
Page269
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
DX2 User Manual
The first time an access code is entered,
any three-digits may be used. Thereafter,
the access code you enter is checked
against the code stored in the controller.
The code you enter must match the stored
code, or access is denied to certain menu
options, as shown in the table in the next
section of this Step 4 Press F1=Restrict
Access or F2=No Restrictions. The
previous menu is displayed.
If the access code is correct, the following three
options are displayed:
|F1|=ENABLE/DISABLE ACCESS
|F2|=CHANGE LEVEL |F3|=CHANGE CODE
|½|
Figure 197: Access Code Options
Step 3
•
Select ENABLE/DISABLE ACCESS to turn on
and off the use of the access code.
•
Select CHANGE LEVEL to change the access
code level.
•
Select CHANGE CODE to enter a new access
code.
Access Restriction
Select F1=ENABLE/DISABLE ACCESS. The
following two options are displayed:
|F1|=RESTRICT ACCESS
|F2|=NO RESTRICTIONS
|½|
Figure 198: Access Restriction Status
Page 270
Appendix D: Access Codes
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The two options are:
•
Select RESTRICT ACCESS to use the access
code to control use of the controller.
•
Select NO RESTRICTIONS to not use the
access code.
Step 4
Press F1=RESTRICT ACCESS to select Restrict
Access or F2=NO RESTRICTIONS to select No
Restrictions, or No Access Code Required. The
Access Code Options menu is displayed.
Step 5
Access Change Level
Select F2=CHANGE LEVEL.
SELECT ACCESS LEVEL
|F1|=LEVEL 1 |F2|=LEVEL 2
|½|
Figure 199: Level Access Selection
There are two options, LEVEL 1 and LEVEL 2.
The Access Level Options table lists the restrictions
applicable for each level.
Press F1 to select Level 1 or F2 to select Level 2.
The Access Code Options menu is displayed.
Step 6
Change Code
Select F3=CHANGE CODE.
Enter the new access code (the code must be three
digits), then press ENTER.
The Access Code Options menu is displayed.
Appendix D: Access Codes
Page271
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Using Access Codes
After the access code is entered, access to the menu items shown
in the following table is restricted.
Table 5: Access Level Options
Menu
Access Level
Access Denied
Main Menu
1
F1, Program
F2, ISC
F4, Manual Operation
2
F1, Program
F2, ISC
Set Up
1,2
Setup Menu, F4,
Controller
1,2
F1, Program
F2, ISC
F3, Stations
F5, Sensors
F2, Omit By Date
User
1,2
Page 272
F1, Time/Date
F2, Language
Appendix D: Access Codes
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
When access codes are used, the menu items listed in the Access
Level Options table are denied and the following screen is
displayed:
ACCESS DENIED
|½|
Figure 200: Access Denied Display
Gain Access Procedure:
Step 1
To gain access to all controller menu options, from
the base screen, advance to the Access Code Entry
menu as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F3=User Option
F3=Access Code
ACCESS CODE:
ENTER ACCESS CODE
|½|
Figure 201: Access Code
Step 2
Enter the correct three-digit access code, then press
ENTER.
If the access code is correct, the Access Code
Options Menu is displayed:
Appendix D: Access Codes
Page273
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
|F1|=ENABLE/DISABLE ACCESS
|F2|=CHANGE LEVEL |F3|=CHANGE CODE
|½|
Figure 202: Access Code Options
Step 3
Select F1=ENABLE/DISABLE ACCESS. The
following two options are displayed:
|F1|=RESTRICT ACCESS
|F2|=NO RESTRICTIONS
|½|
Figure 203: Access Restriction Status
Step 4
Select F2=NO RESTRICTIONS if access code is
not used.
This completes the Access Code procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base screen.
Page 274
Appendix D: Access Codes
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Appendix E
Flow Max
F
low Max is a unique feature specifically designed to manage
multiple Evolution DX2 controllers which share a common
water source.
Figure E-1: “Hardwire Configuration” illustrates a typical
installation.
Note:
The Flow Max feature is not applicable for any
controller which has exclusive use of its water
source (One point of connection (POC) per
controller). Please refer to Appendix A: "Flow
Meters", whenever flow and flow control (Master
Valve and Pump) is required for a single controller
installation.
Flow Max utilizes the intelligence of Evolution DX2 field
satellite controllers to provide the following features:
Operation of shared Master Valves, Pump or Flow
Meters across controllers without the need for peripheral
relays or complex wiring
•
Shared devices may be wired in the conventional fashion
to the nearest controller
•
Dynamic adjustment/validation of station flow limits as
stations turn on and off anywhere in the system
•
Detection of system main line breaks
•
Detection of system unscheduled flow
•
Ability to read the flow GPM rates at any of the
Flow Max participant controllers
•
Automatic establishment of flow limits and
current limits for all the controllers in the system
Appendix E: Flow Max
Appendix: E
Flow Max
•
Page 275
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
•
Automatic system protection for the shared pump in
partial power outages or communication failures
•
Automatic generation of diagnostic system warning
messages at each Flow Max unit
•
Dynamic real time monitor shows system status at all
times
Overview
Flow Max systems intelligently share resources and manage
operations for satellites utilizing a single point of connection
(POC). The shared resources may include a common pump, two
Flow Meters, two Normally Closed Master Valves and one
Normally Open Master Valve.
A Flow Max system is comprised of a number of identical DX2
Controllers (typically 3 to 5) with the first controller set up as the
submaster and the remaining units set up as satellites.
Controllers that share any Pump, Master Valve or Flow Sensor
are defined as Flow Max participants. As Flow Max participants,
the Evolution DX2 controllers must be part of a serial hardwire
configuration. Controllers that are not Flow Max participants
may reside on the hardwire link and are defined as nonparticipants.
The serial hardwire configuration requires a communications
cable and the appropriate communications card at each
controller, as depicted in Figure G-2.
Flow Max provides a means to detect station flow limits and
main line breaks within design and programming limitations.
All controllers participating within a Flow Max system must be
programmed as Flow Max participants from each of their
respective control panels.
Page 276
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Submaster
The Submaster Controller in the Flow Max group is the
watchdog for the entire group. It monitors all participant device
operations such as pumps and master valves. It also issues
corrective action for flow violations, maintains the
communication link status and accumulates all flow related
status. The Submaster allows the user to review all pertinent
shared device information from its control panel. The user can
also monitor real time activity such as measured flow, upper and
lower limit changes as stations transition, as well as flow delay
status.
The Submaster allows flow limits and current limits for each
station of all participant controllers to be established
automatically from one location.
Devices
The devices in a Flow Max system are defined as follows:
• Master Valve 1 (MV1 - normally closed)
• Master Valve 2 (MV2 - normally closed)
• Normally Open Master Valve (N.O.)
• Pump
• Flow Meter 1 (FM1)
• Flow Meter 2 (FM2)
Flow Max allows any participant controller to utilize a shared
device. When a Flow Max participant program/ISC reaches it's
"Start Time," the Submaster initiates a command to turn the
device on. The device will remain on provided there is at least
one program or ISC running that has been set up to share the use
of the device.
The shared device may be connected to any Flow Max
participant controller. Each device connection is made to one
and only one controller. All other participant controllers that
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 277
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
share the use of the device must be programmed at the respective
controller to select the appropriate option.
The Master Valve and Pump devices are physically connected to
the respective controller Master Valve Power Board (Part #
PCDX2-MV). The Flow Meters are connected to the respective
controller Sensor Terminal Board (EV-SEN). Flow Meter
installation instructions are included with the optional Flow
Sensor kit.
Flow Sensors
Flow sensor operation must include the calibration factors of "K"
and "Offset" values for accurate calculations. These values are
required to compensate for the differences between pipe size and
flow sensor used. Complete tables on K and Offset values are
given in Appendix A: Flow Meters.
The satellite controllers that are physically connected to flow
sensors must have the "K" and "OFFSET" values for the
particular flow sensor programmed. The Submaster MUST also
has the "K" and "OFFSET" value programmed identical to those
programmed at the controllers where they are connected.
Caution:
K and Offset value difference between the
submaster and satellites will cause severe errors
in Flow Meter measurements. The results can
virtually eliminate the over-limit protection
features such as Main Flow, Unscheduled Flow,
etc.
The Submaster must also be programmed to identify "Uses Flow
1," "Uses Flow 2," or "Uses Sum of Flow 1 and 2."
Page 278
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Check Delay
The Flow Check Delay provides a specified amount of time
before any limit comparisons or corrective action is taken by the
system. This allows water lines and pressures to stabilize after
station turn on and turn off transitions.
Assume the system has the default check delay of two minutes.
When a station turns on, the flow measurement takes place
immediately, however, the limits will not be checked or reacted
upon until the first reading after the flow check delay has
completed. Keep in mind, that the more station transitions that
occur within the group of Flow Max participants, the more limits
will go un-checked.
Main Line Limits
For any number of controllers within a Flow Max group, there
will only be one Main Flow Limit. Remember that the main
flow limit must be higher than an expected flow under normal
operation yet low enough to react when a main break line occurs.
Flow Max Limitations
Although the number of controllers in a Flow Max system is not
limited, the higher the number of participants, the less control
there is to detect problems.
Assume a total of five controllers in a Flow Max group with all
five controller programs running simultaneously. Each of the
five programs operating has stations that under normal
conditions use 100 Gallons Per Minute to irrigate. Each station
allows for a 10% Upper Limit Tolerance. With a 10% tolerance,
a station normally using 100 GPM would be allowed a maximum
flow of 110 GPM before causing an alarm. With five stations
operating under the same conditions, Flow Max, which sums all
limits, will allow a maximum flow of 550 GPM before causing
an alarm for a station upper limit violation. This means that a
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 279
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
broken head would require a 50 GPM measurable difference
before causing an alarm, not a 10 GPM difference, which
would be the case if only one station had been operating.
Under the conditions above, normal operating flow would be 500
GPM with station limits allowing up to 550 GPM. The main
flow limit must be higher than 550 GPM. The question is, does
a main line break yield more than 550 GPM? That's where
programming and scheduling can accommodate the ability to
keep the main limit within an amount detectable by a real break.
Physical Configuration
The Hardwire Link provides the communication among all
controllers of a standard irrigation system and/or a Flow Max
system. All units are connected in a series configuration using
direct burial EV-CAB-COM twin axial cable. The Hardwire
Link provides reliable communication among the controllers at
distances up to several thousand feet.
Figure E-1: See Hardwire Configuration illustrates a typical
wiring configuration for a 3 controller system.
Caution:
Hardwire Link Cable installation must maintain
polarity for proper operation.
The Controller Hardwire link requires the installation of the
standard Evolution DX2 Communications Circuit Board, RMIS
part # DX-HW.
In a stand-alone configuration, both submaster and satellite units
may be equipped with the standard circuit board.
System configurations that include the Central Control Computer
will require the submaster controller to operate with either a
radio communication board or a phone communication board.
For radio operation, install the RF (radio frequency) Evolution
DX2 Communication Circuit Board, RMIS part # DX-RF. The
submaster will then communicate by radio to the Central Control
Page 280
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Computer and through the hardwire link to the controller
satellites. The DX-RF board communicates to the Central
Control Computer via the 25-pin RS=232 connected to J1.
For phone communication, install the phone DX2
Communication Circuit Board, RMIS part # DX-PH. The
submaster will then communicate by phone (modem) to the
Central Control Computer and through the hardwire link to the
controller satellites. The DX-PH board communicates to the
Central Control Computer via the RJ-11 phone connected to J5.
The following pictorial diagrams of Figures 1, 2 and 3 illustrate
the wiring detail and connections of a typical system
configuration:
Pump
Master
Valve
Flow
Sensor
Zone
Valve
Zone
Valve
Zone
Valve
Submaster
Controller
Address 1–0
Zone
Valve
Zone
Valve
Satellite
Address 1–1
EV-CAB-COM
Zone
Valve
Satellite
Address 1–2
EV-CAB-COM
EV-CAB-SEN
Figure 204: Flow Max Hardwire Configuration
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 281
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
SUBMASTER CONTROLLER
ADDRESS 1–0
SATELLITE
ADDRESS 1–1
SATELLITE
ADDRESS 1–2
DX-HW, DX-PH OR DX-RF
COMMUNICATION BOARD
DX-HW
COMMUNICATION BOARD
DX-HW
COMMUNICATION BOARD
+ – + –
+ – + –
+ – + –
IN
OUT
Copper
Wire
IN
Tinned
Wire
Copper
Wire
From “OUT”
Port of DX-XX
To “IN” Port
of DX-HW
OUT
IN
Tinned
Wire
Copper
Wire
To “IN” Port
of DX-HW
From “OUT”
Port of DX-HW
EV-CAB-COM
OUT
Tinned
Wire
EV-CAB-COM
SUBMASTER
CONTROLLER
ADDRESS 1–0
SATELLITE
ADDRESS 1–1
SATELLITE
ADDRESS 1–2
From “OUT”
Port of DX-HW
From “OUT”
Port of DX-XX
EV-CAB-COM
To “IN” Port
of DX-HW
EV-CAB-COM
To “IN” Port
of DX-HW
DWG DXHW40A
Figure 205: Detailed Hardwire Connections
Page 282
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
MASTER
VALVE
ZONE 2
VALVE
PCDX2-MV
PCDX2-OT12
BLUE
12VAC
ORANGE
24VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
STATION 2
MV1 MV2 N.O. PUMP COM
COM
TO MASTER VALVE
TO ZONE 2 VALVE
DWG DXMV10A
Figure 206: Detailed Master Valve and Station Connections
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 283
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Master Valve/Pump Configuration
The Master Valve or Pump may be physically connected to any
controller of the system, which is then shared by the remaining
controller units. Any given valve/pump may be physically
connected to only one controller.
The Master Valve Power Board (RMIS Part # PCDX2-MV)
supplies the power and control for the Master Valves and Pump.
Every controller is equipped with this board assembly, providing
the ability to connect any given valve/pump to any controller.
Connections are made to the screw terminals as depicted in
Figure E-3. One wire of the valve/pump connects to its
associated terminal and the other (common) wire connects to the
COM terminal.
Page 284
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Setup Procedure
Overview
The following section details the programming required in order
to setup a Flow Max configuration. Programming must be
performed at all controllers which are utilizing this feature.
A typical Flow Max setup includes the following:
Submaster:
• Submaster Address Entry
• Share Mode Selection
• Share Devices Configuration
• Flow Meter K and Offset Values
• Station Number and Valve/Pump Assignments
• Unscheduled Flow Limits
Satellite:
Non-Participant
• Controller Configuration (Normal Mode)
Participant
• Share mode selection
• Share devices configuration
• Flow Meter K and Offset Values (if connected to this
satellite)
This procedure utilizes the configuration depicted in Figure E-1:
Hardwire Configuration with a submaster address of 1-0. The
figure illustrates a system consisting of three controllers, a
Pump, one Master Valve and one 2 inch Flow Sensor. The
Pump is physically connected to the submaster and the Master
Valve and Flow Sensor are physically connected to satellite
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 285
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
address 1-1. Table 1:Flow Max Sample Worksheet lists the
parameters for each controller.
Submaster Setup Procedure
Step 1
Set up the first controller of the hardwire link as the
Submaster by advancing through the following
sequences:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
F2=Acts As Submaster
F1=Radio/Wire
ADDRESS: 001
ENTER ADDRESS ( 0-255 )
|½|
Figure 207: Submaster Address Entry
Enter 1 then press ENTER to return to Main Menu.
Note:
Step 2
For further information on creating the
Submaster, refer to Chapter 4: Setup.
Select the devices which are to be shared in the Flow
Max operation from the following menu sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
F3=Flow Max
Page 286
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
|F1|=SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
|F3|=NORMAL MODE
DX2 User Manual
NOW = F1
|½|
Figure 208: Master Valve/Pump Selection
Step 3
Select F1=SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV.
Note:
Step 4
This selection specifies that the Flow Sensor, Pump
and Master Valve will be shared by all participating
controllers. All participant Satellite Controllers of a
Flow Max system should be set up with:
• F1=SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
• F3=NORMAL MODE
Selection applies to non-participating units that
reside within a hardwire link configuration.
Non Flow Max participants may utilize their local
pump, master valves and flow meters in a
conventional fashion. This operation will be
independent of any Flow Max activity.
Configure the Submaster in the Flow Max Mode,
select F3=FLOW MAX and select the connected
devices as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
F3=Flow Max
F1=Share Flow, Pump & MV
IS FLOW METER 1 CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=NO
|½|
Figure 209: Flow Meter 1 Connection
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 287
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 5
Select F2=NO.
Note:
Step 6
The NO response asserts that Flow Meter 1 is
not physically connected to this controller and
will not be under the control of this controller.
Using the Down Arrow key, advance to the Flow
Meter 2 Input display and select F2=NO.
Note:
Step 7
DX2 User Manual
There is no second flow meter in our example
procedure.
Press the Down Arrow key to advance to the
following display:
IS THE PUMP CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=YES
|½|
Figure 210: Pump Connection
Step 8
Press F1=YES.
Step 9
Press the Down Arrow key to advance to the
following display:
IS SHARED MV1 CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=YES
|½|
Figure 211: Master Valve 1 Connection
Step 10
Press F2=NO.
Step 11
Press the Down Arrow key to advance to the
following display:
Page 288
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
IS SHARED MV2 CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=YES
|½|
Figure 212: Master Valve 2 Connection
Step 12
Press F2=NO, this example procedure does not
utilize MV2.
Step 13
Press the Down Arrow key to advance to the
following display:
IS SHARED N.O. CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=NO
|½|
Figure 213: Normally Open Valve Connection
Step 14
Press F2=NO, this example procedure does not
utilize a Normally Open Master Valve.
Step 15
Using the Down Arrow key, advance to the
following display and enter the least significant
portion of the last address of the satellite
configuration.
Note:
If all satellite controllers are communicating
properly, the last address will automatically appear
in the display.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 289
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
LAST ADDRESS: 02
ENTER ADDRESS ( 0-50 )
|½|
Figure 214: Last Address Entry
Step 16 In a three controller system, the address of the last unit
is xxx-02. Enter 02 then press ENTER.
Note:
If the correct address appears in the display, just
press ENTER.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Step 17
Flow Meter K and Offset Values
All Flow Meter K and Offset values of both Flow
Meter 1 and Flow Meter 2 (if used) must be entered
at the Submaster Controller, regardless of physical
connection location. The values must also be
entered at the Satellite Controllers that are physically
connected to Flow Meter 1 or 2.
Set the K VALUE and OFFSET VALUE in the
Submaster by advancing through the following
menus:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F5=Sensors
F2=Flow
|F1|=FLOW METER 1
|F2|=FLOW METER 2
|½|
Figure 215: Flow Meter Selection
Page 290
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Select F1=FLOW METER 1.
Note:
Step 18
Refer to Appendix A to select the
proper K value and Offset value for
your installation.
From the Set Value display, press F1=SET K
VALUE to advance to the K VALUE entry screen:
FLOW 1 K VALUE: 744
ENTER K VALUE ( 0-56000 )
|½|
Figure 216: K Value Entry
Enter the appropriate K VALUE then press ENTER.
Step 19
Select F2=SET OFFSET VALUE to advance to the
following OFFSET parameter display.
FLOW 1 OFFSET VALUE: 273
ENTER OFFSET VALUE ( 026000 )
|½|
Figure 217: Offset Value Entry
Enter the appropriate OFFSET VALUE.
Note:
Step 20
For further information on K VALUE and
OFFSET, refer to Chapter 4: Setup and
Appendix A: Flow Meter.
This completes the Submaster Setup procedure.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 291
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Flow Max Main Line Flow Limits Procedure
This procedure establishes the maximum flow limit for the
complete Flow Max irrigation system.
In a Flow Max system, the total GPM of all participating
controllers is calculated into the overall Main Line Flow Limit
value. The Main Line Flow Limit is entered at the submaster
controller only. For any number of controllers within a Flow
Max group, there will only be one Main Line Flow Limit.
Remember that the Main Line Flow Limit must be higher than
an expected flow under normal operation yet low enough to react
when a main break occurs.
Main Flow Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the Station Number/Master Valve Entry
screen through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
F2=Limits/Type
STATION NUMBER:
ENTER STATION NUMBER ( 1-48 , OX = MV )
|½|
Figure 218: Main Flow Limit Entry
Step 2
Page 292
Enter 01 (zero 1) then press ENTER. The following
screen options are displayed:
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
|F1|=CURRENT LIMIT
DX2 User Manual
|F2|=FLOW LIMIT
|½|
Figure 219: Main Limit Options
Step 3
Select F2=FLOW LIMIT. The maximum main flow
limit is displayed (the default value is 2000 GPM).
MAIN FLOW MAX FLOW LIMIT: 2000
ENTER MAX LIMIT (0-2000)
|½|
Figure 220: Main Flow Maximum Limit
Step 4
Enter the determined value for your system and
press ENTER. Press QUIT to return to the base
screen.
This completes the Main Flow Limit procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Step 5
Unscheduled Flow Limit
From the base menu, advance to the UNSCHED
FLOW LIMIT display through the following
sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F1=Flow Options
F4= Unsched Limit
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 293
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
UNSCHED FLOW LIMIT: 200
ENTER LIMIT ( 0-2000 )
|½|
Figure 221: Unsched Flow Limit
Enter the appropriate value then press ENTER.
This value sets the maximum allowable flow when
NO stations are on (units in GPM).
This completes the Flow Max setup procedure at the
submaster.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Satellite Controllers
Procedure
The remaining two Satellite Controllers may be configured to
either of the two following options:
•
Non-participant Satellite - Satellite IS NOT part of the
Flow Max system.
•
Participant Satellite - Satellite IS part of the FlowMax
system utilizing one or more shared devices.
Step 1
Non-participant Satellite
Note: This step does not apply to our sample procedure.
Advance through the following displays to clear all
Flow Max connections:
Page 294
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
F3=Flow Max
|F1|=SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
|F3|=NORMAL MODE
|½|
Figure 222: Normal Mode
Select F3=NORMAL MODE.
The controller returns to the base menu.
Step 2
Participant Satellite
(No Physical Device Connection)
Establish the Flow Max mode at the satellite by
advancing to the configuration display as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
F3=Flow Max
|F1|=SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
|F3|=NORMAL MODE
|½|
Figure 223: Controller Options
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 295
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Select F1=SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV and verify
that the Main Menu returns.
Note:
This mode selection must coincide with what
was programmed at the submaster.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Step 3
Set up device parameters by advancing to the Flow
Max display through the following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
F3=Flow Max
F1=Share Flow, Pump & MV
IS FLOW METER 1 CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=NO
|½|
Figure 224: Flow Meter Connection
Step 4
Enter F2=NO and press the Down Arrow. Repeat
for the five remaining displays and respond to each
of the following displays with F2=NO:
•
•
•
•
•
Page 296
Is Flow Meter 2 Connected To This Clock?
Then press the Down Arrow key.
Is The Pump Connected To This Clock?
Then press the Down Arrow key.
Is Shared MV1 Connected To This Clock?
Then press the Down Arrow key.
Is Shared MV2 Connected To This Clock?
Then press the Down Arrow key.
Is Shared N.O. Connected To This Clock?
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Then press the Down Arrow key.
In larger installations, repeat step on all remaining
controllers with no physical device connected.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Step 5
Participant Satellite (Physical Device Connected)
This procedure assumes our example configuration
with devices MV1 and FM1 physically connected to
Satellite address 1-1.
Advance to the Flow Meter display through the
following sequence:
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F4=Controller
F4=Configuration
F3=Flow Max
F1=Share Flow, Pump & MV
IS FLOW METER 1 CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=NO
|½|
Figure 225: Flow Meter Connection
Step 6
Using the Down Arrow key, respond to the six
sub-menus of the SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
Menu accordingly, per the system configuration.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 297
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Select F1=YES, then press Down Arrow
key.
This selection must be identical to the
submaster setup. Select F1=YES for
Flow Meter 1.
The K and Offset Values will require
configuration using the exact same
values as entered for the submaster.
Refer to the Flow Meter K and Offset
Values section of the Submaster
procedure.
Step 7
Press the Down Arrow key.
Is Flow Meter 2 connected to the clock?
Step 8
Press F1=NO, then press the Down Arrow key.
Is the Pump connected to this clock?
Step 9
Press F1=NO, then press the Down Arrow key.
IS SHARED MV1 CONNECTED TO THIS CLOCK?
|F1|=YES |F2|=NO
NOW=YES
|½|
Figure 226: Master Valve Connection
Step 10
Select F1=YES for MV1 to complete the
configuration for this sample procedure.
Once all the participants have been programmed
with the Flow Max configuration data:
•
Page 298
Program each satellite with the desired irrigation
program(s).
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Note:
•
DX2 User Manual
Insure the program(s) have been set up
properly for usage of a Master Valve and/or
Pump.
Flow limits must be established for all stations
in the system. Flow limits can be established
using the Auto Limits feature.
This completes the Setup procedure for the satellite controllers.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 299
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
F1=Main Menu
F5=Setup
F3=Stations
F3=Auto Limits
|F1|=RUN AUTO LIMITS |F2|=SET LIMIT ( % )
|F3|=AUTO LIMITS FOR ALL SATELLITES
|½|
Figure 227: Auto Limits
Selecting F2=SET LIMIT (%) allows a global % to be
used for upper limit calculations. Be sure to set the %
before selecting the F3 or F1 option.
Selecting F3=AUTO LIMITS FOR ALL
SATELLITES will start the Auto Limits function. All
Flow Max participants will be tested. Each station is
turned on one at a time and the flow limits will be
automatically learned.
Note: This selection applies to the submaster only.
Page 300
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Worksheet
The Flow Max Worksheet lists all parameters for the example
Flow Max configuration. This table may serve as a guide to
setting up a future Flow Max system.
Table 6: Flow Max Sample Worksheet
Menu
Function
Submaster
Controller 1
Controller 2
1-0
1-1
1-2
yes
yes
yes
Flow Meter 1
Flow Meter 2
Pump
Shared MV 1
Shared MV2
Shared N.O.
No
n/a
yes
No
n/a
n/a
yes
n/a
no
yes
n/a
n/a
no
n/a
no
yes
n/a
n/a
Last Address
2
K/Offset Value
Flow Limits
Main Limits
Unsched Limit
Nonparticipant
yes
yes
yes
yes
(auto
config)
yes
yes
no
no
(auto
config)
no
yes
no
no
No
no
no
Address
Share Flow
Pump & MV
Device Connection
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 301
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Worksheet
Menu
Function
Submaster
Controller Controller Controller
1
2
3
Address
Share Flow
Pump &
MV
Flow Meter
1
Flow Meter
2
Pump
Shared MV
1
Shared
MV2
Shared N.O.
Last
Address
K/Offset
Value
Flow Limits
Main Limits
Unsched
Limit
Nonparticipant
(auto
config)
(auto
config)
(auto
config)
Device Connection
Page 302
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Water Flow
Pump
Submaster
Master
Valve 1
DX2 User Manual
Flow
Meter 1
Station Wiring
Submaster Water
Valve Stations
Station Wiring
Controller 1 Water
Valve Stations
Station Wiring
Controller 2 Water
Valve Stations
Hardwire Link
Controller 1
Hardwire Link
Controller 2
Figure 228: Configuration Block Diagram
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 303
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Diagnostic Tools
Real Time Flow Monitor
A Real Time Flow Monitor is available at the submaster
controller of a Flow Max system. This tool provides a wealth of
information about the operational status of the system. The real
time monitor can be started and run in the back ground as the
system is running.
Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the real time flow screen display as
follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
F2=Measurements
F1=Flow
F1 = 126
F2 = 0
UL = 150 MV1 = ON MV2 = OFF P = ON
L = 75 TF = 126 FD NO = OFF |½|
Figure 229: Submaster Real Time Review
The Real Time Flow Monitor updates continuously
and displays:
Page 304
•
Flow from Flow Sensors one and two ( F1, F2)
•
The sum to Flow Sensor a and Flow Senor 2
(TF)
•
The dynamic flow upper limit (UL), changes
whenever stations at any controller transition On
or Off
•
The dynamic flow lower limit (L), changes
whenever stations at any controller transition On
or Off
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
•
The status of Master Valves and Pump (On or
Off)
MV1
MV2
NO
P
•
DX2 User Manual
=
=
=
=
master valve 1
master valve 2
Normally open master valve
PUMP
The status of whether the submaster is in Flow
Delay (FD) mode. If “FD” appears on the
second line of the display this indicates that flow
delay is in effect, hence limits are not being
checked. The absence of "FD" from the display
means that the measured flow is being checked
against the displayed limits.
The Real Time Flow Monitor is a useful tool for
verifying that the proper flow delay has been
programmed for the system. Flow readings should
stabilize a minimum of 20 to 30 seconds prior to the
"FD" removal from the display. This should provide
adequate margin when programming this parameter.
Step 2
In addition to the submaster capabilities, each
participant controller of the Flow Max system can
display the measured flow. Flow is monitored at the
Flow Max participant using the same key sequence
as at the submaster.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
From the Flow Max participant controller, advance
to the satellite measured flow screen as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
F2=Measurements
F1=Flow
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 305
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
FLOW # 1
FLOW # 2
GPM = 0
GPM = 0
DX2 User Manual
TOTAL GPM = 0
|½|
Figure 230: Satellite Real Time Review
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Review Flow Max Physical Configuration
The Flow Max physical configuration can be reviewed after it
has been entered into all Flow Max participants. The review
capability is available at the submaster only.
Review All Procedure
Step 1
Advance to the program display screen as follows:
F1=Main Menu
F3=Status
F4=Review All
P1 : MO TU WE WH FR
WATER DAYS FOR WEEK 1
|½|
Figure 231: Program Parameters
The first display indicates the program number and
the watering days as programmed.
Step 2
Page 306
Press the Down Arrow key repeatedly to step
through all parameters of the program.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Continue pressing the Down Arrow key until the
following submaster configuration screen is
displayed:
ADDRESS: 000
DEVICES:
MODE: SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
MV1
PUMP |½|
Figure 232: Submaster Configuration
This configuration screen displays the submaster
address, the selected mode, and the devices that are
physically connected to the submaster.
Step 3
Press the Down Arrow key to display the screen for
the next satellite address unit.
ADDRESS: 001
DEVICES:
MODE: SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
|½|
Figure 233: Satellite 001 Configuration
Satellite address 001 is configured to the same
mode, with no physical devices connected.
Step 4
Press the Down Arrow to display the screen for the
next satellite address unit.
ADDRESS: 002
DEVICES: FM1
MODE: SHARE FLOW, PUMP & MV
|½|
Figure 234: Satellite 002 Configuration
Satellite address 002 is configured to the same
mode, but with Flow Meter 1 physically connected.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 307
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 5
DX2 User Manual
Continue pressing the Down Arrow key to review all
remaining satellite units.
Note:
A device can only be physically connected to
one controller. Duplicate device assignments
must be checked, verified and eliminated.
This completes the Flow Max REVIEW ALL procedure.
Press the QUIT key to return to the base menu.
Page 308
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Warnings and Exception Conditions
All warnings referenced in this section are described fully in
Chapter 10, Flow Max warnings. Please refer to that section for
details. Most exception conditions result in warnings being
generated at the submaster as well as each Flow Max participant.
Different information however will appear at different controller
locations depending upon the circumstances.
Flow Max Lower Limit Violation
The submaster has determined that the measured flow from the
flow meters(s) is less than the expected flow. Irrigation is
terminated for all stations which were on at the time of the
violation. Programs automatically advance to their next
scheduled station.
SUBMASTER WARNING SATELLITE WARNING
FM FLOW LO LIM
FM STATION ADVANCE
This warning includes a list of Lists the station(s) which
satellites which had stations
were on
on at the time of the alarm.
Note:
FM STATION ADVANCE
only appears at the satellite
if at least one station was
turned on.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 309
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Upper Limit Violation
The submaster has determined that the measured flow from the
flow meters(s) is greater than the expected flow. Irrigation is
terminated for all stations which were on at the time of the
violation. Programs automatically advance to their next
scheduled station.
SUBMASTER WARNING
SATELLITE WARNING
FM FLOW UP LIM
FM STATION ADVANCE
This warning includes a list of
satellites which had stations on at
the time of the alarm.
Lists the station(s) which
were on.
Note:
FM STATION ADVANCE
only appears at the satellite
if at least one station was
turned on.
Page 310
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Communications Failure
The hardwire data communications between the submaster
and one or more satellites has been lost or interrupted. This
may be indicative of a failure of the communications cable
which runs to/from each satellite in a Flow Max
configuration. All irrigation is terminated.
SUBMASTER WARNING SATELLITE WARNING
HW COMM FAIL
OFFLINE
FM STOP WATER
Lists the station(s) which
were on.
Note: The "OFFLINE"
warning only appears at the
satellite (s) which lost hard
wire communications.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 311
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max Main Flow
The main line limit for the Flow Max system has been exceeded.
All irrigation is terminated and all future scheduled irrigation
will be inhibited.
SUBMASTER WARNING SATELLITE WARNING
FM MAIN FLOW
FM STOP WATER
This warning includes a list
of satellites which had
stations on at the time of the
alarm.
Lists the station(s) which
were on.
Flow Max Unscheduled Flow
Flow was detected but no controllers within the system had any
stations which were turned on.
The normally open master valve will be energized and all future
scheduled irrigation will be inhibited.
SUBMASTER WARNING SATELLITE WARNING
UNSCHED LIMIT
FM STOP WATER
This warning includes a list
of satellites which had
stations on at the time of the
alarm.
Lists the station(s) which
were on.
Page 312
Appendix E: Flow Max
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This page left intentionally blank.
Appendix E: Flow Max
Page 313
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Appendix F
Troubleshooting Basics
W
hen troubleshooting a field wiring problem, it will become
necessary to verify that the wires and connections are reliable
and secure.
Wires must be checked for continuity using an appropriate tester
or instrument. The continuity of a wire refers to its ability to
conduct electrical current throughout the entire length of the
wire. When a wire successfully delivers current flow from a
source to a destination, it is referred to as a complete or closed
circuit. If a wire becomes broken somewhere along the line, the
continuity is destroyed, therefore the wire is said to be open.
This condition is defined as an open circuit.
The ohmmeter is generally part of a three-in-one type of
instrument called a multimeter. The multimeter
measures voltage, current or resistance. The multimeter
is also referred to as a Voltage Ohm Meter (VOM).
Each function has its own set of measurement scales and
ranges, which are used independently from each other.
Page 314
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Appendix: F
Troubleshooting
The instrument most commonly used to check continuity is the
ohmmeter. In addition to continuity, this meter also measures
resistance of wires or electronic components. The ohmmeter is
available in either analog or digital design. The analog version
uses a basic meter needle movement whereas the digital version
provides a digital readout display. The meter may also feature a
buzzer or beeper used for easily checking continuity by listening
for an audible sound to verify a complete circuit. A more
simplified device is the continuity checker, which only provides
an audible tone and does not measure resistance.
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
The type of instrument you choose depends on your application
and requirements, however, the multimeter is recommended for
its overall versatility. The multimeter can be a useful tool in
diagnosing approximately 90% of all electrical problems.
Analog Multimeters
The following pictorial diagram illustrates a typical analog
multimeter. The face of the meter displays a resistance scale on
the top and a DC voltage scale below (the AC voltage scales are
not shown for simplification). The resistance is measured in
units called Ohms. The full scale ranges from 0 Ohms to 5
thousand Ohms (5K=5 thousand) (K=Kilo). The ohmmeter scale
usually reads from right to left.
The symbol for Ohm is the Omega Greek letter Ω .
Figure 235: Analog Multimeter
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Page315
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Resistance Scale
The actual resistance reading is determined by the Range
Selector Knob, which is illustrated in the X1 (times 1) position.
The X1 means that any registered reading on the Ohms scale
should be multiplied by 1. The X100 range means that any
reading on the Ohms scale should be multiplied by 100. The
x10K means that any reading on the Ohms scales should be
multiplied by 10,000.
The illustration is reading approximately 3K (3,000) Ohms,
because the selector knob is set to the X1 scale. This reading,
however, for all practical purposes, is erroneous because the
meter leads are not connected to anything (open circuit).
The two meter leads are generally black for common (negative
or ground) and red for positive. If you touch the two leads
together, the needle should go to the 0 (zero) reading, which
indicates continuity (zero resistance) between the positive and
negative terminals.
If the needle does not completely go to zero, adjust the Zero Adj.
knob to set the needle to 0. Due to the internal meter battery,
this is often necessary to maintain reasonable calibration of the
meter resistance readings. As a general rule, you should always
zero the meter prior to making resistance measurements or when
checking continuity.
Voltage Scale
The voltage measurements operate in a similar manner as the
resistance measurements. The scales, however read left to right
with 0 volts at the extreme left. The Selector knob is set to the
appropriate DC or AC scale and the measurement is read out
directly. A prime consideration when making DC voltage
measurements is the polarity of the leads. You should be aware
that a positive (+) voltage must be measured with the positive
lead on the voltage point and the negative (-) lead connected to
ground.
Page 316
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Digital Multimeters
The digital multimeter is the meter of choice in today's technical
world. These instruments are easy to use, highly accurate and
offer features, such as automatic ranging, built-in continuity
beeper, diode test and automatic polarity sensing.
Resistance measurements are easily made by merely switching to
the Ohm position and measuring. The measurement is displayed
directly or may be accompanied by a K or an M, indicating
Kilohms (thousand) or Megohms (million).
Voltage measurements are displayed regardless of polarity. If
the voltage is negative, the display will be indicated with
a - (minus) sign.
Switching to the continuity position provides a continuous tone
in continuity checks. This allows for quick continuity checks
without looking at the digital display.
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Page317
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Troubleshooting
This discussion will consider the most commonly used wiring
configuration, which is the two conductor cable. The two
conductor cable contains two individual insulated wires enclosed
inside a shielded common outside insulation covering. This type
of cable is used in the installation of field valve solenoids, flow
sensors, moisture sensors; hardwire communications, wind
anemometers, rain gauges, ET Weather Computers and many
others.
Cable Checkout Procedure
The following procedure is a recommended method in
troubleshooting a wiring continuity problem using an ohmmeter
or a continuity checker.
Step 1
Disconnect both wires of the cable from the
controller Station Output Board, Master/Valve
Power Board or Sensor Terminal Board.
Step 2
Separate the wires making sure that they do not
touch each other.
Step 3
Locate the other end of the cable and disconnect the
two wires from either the valve solenoid, sensor or
any other device. Separate the wires making sure
that they do not touch each other.
The cable should now be isolated from the system
and the wires isolated from each other.
Step 4
Locate the two wires at one end of the cable. Using
an ohmmeter or a continuity checker, connect one
meter lead to one wire and the other meter lead to
the other wire.
Page 318
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
Step 5
DX2 User Manual
Verify that there is no reading or audible tone. A
reading at this point indicates that a short exists
between the two wires.
If this is the case, examine the wires carefully at
both ends to determine where they may be touching
(shorted). If the cable also connects to a terminal
block, check for shorts in the terminal block.
If the short cannot be located, replace the cable.
Step 6
If no short exists; connect the two wires at one end
by twisting the wires together. At the other end of
the cable, connect one meter lead to one wire and the
other meter lead to the other wire, as depicted in
Figure F-1.
The meter should indicate a reading, which verifies
continuity. The reading will most likely not be zero,
since there is an expected amount of resistance in the
wire. A reading of 20 ohms or less would be
acceptable.
Step 7
If no reading is displayed, the cable is open and
should be checked or replaced. Further checkout of
a cable depends on the cable location and installation
conditions. If the cable is not buried and only a
short distance from one end to the other, the two
ends of a single wire may be brought together for a
continuity check.
If this is possible, disconnect the two wires that were
twisted together earlier. Connect one meter lead to
one end of a single wire and the other lead to the
other end of the same wire. Check the remaining
wire in the same manner. Verify the continuity of
each wire.
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Page319
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
METER
-
TWIST WIRES
TOGETHER
+
WIRE OR CABLE
Figure 236: Cable Continuity Check
Page 320
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Polarity Checkout Procedure
In some cases, it will become necessary to identify the polarity
of two wires in an installation to prevent possible damage to
your equipment. This is when a positive wire must be connected
to the positive terminal and the negative wire must be connected
to the negative terminal. If the wires are colored or easily
identified, polarity is no problem. The standard Rain Master
cables are easy to identify because one wire is copper and the
other is tinned (silver).
However, there may be custom installations where the wire
colors may be the same, which will make identification very
difficult. The following procedures offer two methods of
checking polarity.
This procedure assumes two wires of the same color are twisted
together into one installation cable extending from a controller to
an on-site location of a sensor (flow, rain, or anemometer).
Required Equipment
1 Volt Meter (VOM)
1 Flashlight Battery (1.5 Volts)
Procedure
Step 1
Verify that the cable is not connected at either end.
Step 2
At one end of the cable, connect the flashlight
battery between the two wires. At the other end,
connect one meter lead to one wire and the other
lead to the other wire, as depicted in Figure F-2.
Step 3
Set the meter to DC volts. If the meter has a DC
scale selection, set it to the lowest scale.
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Page321
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Step 4
Observe the meter for a reading of approximately
1.5 volts. If the voltage reads negative; a digital
meter will display a minus (-) sign, an analog meter
needle will travel in the opposite direction going off
the scale. If your meter indicates a negative reading,
reverse the meter leads on the wires.
Step 5
With the meter leads properly polarized, the reading
should now be positive 1.5 volts. The wire
connected to the positive (red) meter lead may now
be identified as positive. The wire connected to the
negative (black) meter lead may now be identified as
negative.
Identify each wire using a colored pen, tape, or label.
Step 6
Identify, label, or mark the two wires at the other
end of the cable. The battery end with the extended
tip is the positive side (+).
Step 7
The cable may now be connected to the appropriate
terminals and device. Be sure to observe polarity
when making connections.
Step 8
This completes the polarity checkout procedure.
Page 322
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
METER
+
-
+
1.5 V
Battery
WIRE OR CABLE
-
Figure 237: Polarity Check
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Page323
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Alternate Polarity Checkout Procedure
This procedure assumes that an Evolution DX2 Controller,
equipped with a Sensor Terminal Board is available and may be
used for testing. The four sensor inputs on the Sensor Terminal
Board (labeled as Input 1 through Input 4) may be used as a
source voltage to test the polarity of a cable. This procedure
applies +8 volts to the cable under test, allowing the voltage to
be read at the other end.
Required Equipment
1 Volt Meter (VOM)
Procedure
Step 1
Connect one wire of the cable to the negative (-)
terminal of Input 1 on the Sensor Terminal Board.
Connect the remaining wire to the positive (+)
terminal of Input 1.
Step 2
Turn on the controller, if not already on.
Step 3
Set the volt meter to the DC scale and select a
voltage range, if necessary, to read approximately +8
volts.
Step 4
Connect the volt meter to the Input 1 terminals with
the negative (black) lead to the negative side and the
positive (red) lead to the positive side. Verify a
meter reading of approximately +8 volts.
Step 5
Disconnect the meter and connect the meter leads to
the other end of the cable. Read the voltage on the
meter, as depicted in Figure F-3.
Page 324
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
If the voltage reads negative; a digital meter will
display a minus (-) sign, an analog meter needle will
travel in the opposite direction going off the scale.
If your meter indicates a negative reading, reverse
the meter leads on the wires.
Step 6
With the meter leads properly polarized, the reading
should now be positive +8 volts. The wire
connected to the positive (red) meter lead may now
be identified as positive. The wire connected to the
negative (black) meter lead may now be identified as
negative.
Step 7
Identify each wire using a colored pen, tape, or label.
To avoid any future confusion, identify and label or
mark the two wires at the sensor board end of the
cable.
Step 8
With the wires properly identified, the cable may
now be connected to the appropriate sensor
terminals and to the sensor device. Be sure to
observe polarity when making final connections.
Step 9
This completes the Alternate Polarity Checkout
procedure.
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Page325
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
METER
+
INPUT
-
-
+
WIRE OR CABLE
SENSOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
Figure 238: +8 Volt Polarity Check
Page 326
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This page left intentionally blank.
Appendix F: Troubleshooting Basics
Page 327
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
RAIN MASTER LIMITED WARRANTY
Rain Master Irrigation Systems Inc. warrants to the first customer purchaser
that this Rain Master brand product (the "product"), when shipped in its
original container, will be free from defective workmanship, and materials and
agrees that it will, at its option, either repair the defect or replace the defective
product or part thereof at no charge to the purchaser for parts or labor for the
time period set forth below.
This warrant does not apply to any appearance items of the product nor to any
product the exterior of which has been damaged, or defaced, which has been
subjected to misuse, abnormal service or handling, or which has been altered or
modified in design or construction. (See additional exclusion below).
In order to enforce the rights under this limited warranty, the purchaser should
ship or carry the product to a Rain Master authorized service depot, or send
product prepaid to Rain Master at the address below (ensuring product is
packaged correctly for shipment).
For nearest location, call Rain Master Service Center 1-805-527-4498.
This limited warrant described above is in addition to whatever implied
warranties may be granted to purchasers by law.
(All implied warranties including the warranty of merchantability, and fit for
use are limited to the period(s) from date of purchase set forth below).
Neither the sales personnel of the seller nor any other person is authorized to
make any warranties other than those described above, or to extend the duration
of any warranties beyond the time period described herein.
The warranties described above shall be the sole and exclusive warranties
granted by Rain Master Irrigation Systems Inc. and shall be the sole and
exclusive remedy available to the purchaser. Correction of defects, in the
manner and period of time described herein, shall constitute complete
fulfillment of all liabilities and responsibilities of Rain Master to the purchaser
with respect to the product, and shall constitute full satisfaction of all claims,
whether based on contract, negligence, and strict liability or otherwise.
In no event shall Rain Master be liable or in any way responsible, for any
damages or defects in the product which were caused by repairs or attempted
repairs performed by anyone other than a Rain Master Service dealer or center.
Nor shall Rain Master be liable or in any way responsible for an incidental or
consequential economic or property damage. Some states do not allow the
exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may
not apply to you.
Warranty
Page 355
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
This limited warranty does not apply to improper installation or grounding, acts
of God, such as lightning and/or power surges, floods, earthquakes, hurricane,
tornados, vandalism etc.
The RME EAGLE Controller has a 5 year limited warrant from date of
purchase.
All other Rain Master Brand products carry a 2 year limited warranty unless
otherwise specified.
SERVICE
Should it be necessary to require servicing of your controller, contact your local
Rain Master distributor or contact Rain Master at 1-805-527-4498 for a listing
of distributors in your area.
When sending a controller or a component of the controller back to be serviced,
ensure it is properly protected with a soft packaging material, and that the box
will withstand normal shipping abuses. Enclose a complete description of the
type of problem that is occurring, and be sure to put your name, address and
phone number where you can be reached.
WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions
manual, may cause interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
The user is cautioned that changes and modifications made to the equipment without
approval of the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
3910-B Royal Ave.
Tel (805) 527-4498
Simi Valley,CA 93063
Fax (805) 527-2813
www.rainmaster.com
RMIS Part No. 500052 Revision D
Page 356
Warranty
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Index
A
About This Manual............................................................................................ 1
AC Power Supply Wiring................................................................................ 21
access code .................................................................................................... 328
access code entry.......................................................................................... 269
access code level.............................................................................................. 78
access code restrictions.................................................................................... 78
access enable/disable ....................................................................................... 77
address........................................................................................................... 153
address assignment ........................................................................................ 154
alarm.......................................................................................................190, 328
Analog Multimeters....................................................................................... 315
anemometer ............................................................................................159, 328
arrow keys ....................................................................................................... 11
assembly layout ............................................................................................... 20
at water limit.................................................................................................... 41
at water limits options...................................................................................... 46
auto limits ................................................................... 52, 63, 205, 256, 300, 328
auto limits options ........................................................................................... 64
automatic mode ............................................................................................... 12
B
base screen..................................................................................................... 328
base screen central ......................................................................................... 153
base screen user prompts ................................................................................. 13
base screen valid PGM .................................................................................... 12
beep responses................................................................................................ 17
C
Cable Checkout Procedure ......................................................................... 318
calibration tables ......................................................................................... 235
offset and K values................................................................................... 248
Canceling and Continuing Watering Programs ............................................. 266
central computer .....................................................................................109, 153
Central Control .............................................................................................. 153
central control mode ...............................................................................153, 328
Central User................................................................................................... 329
clear program definition ................................................................................ 116
clear program procedure ............................................................................ 116
clear warning report................................................................................144, 163
comm status................................................................................................... 124
Page 338
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Comm Status.................................................................................................. 124
commercial sensor devices ............................................................................ 230
common connections ....................................................................................... 19
common interrupt devices.............................................................................. 230
communication board .............................................................................. 19, 280
communication options.................................................................... 19, 153, 154
communications failure.................................................................................. 206
Condemned station ........................................................................................ 329
configuration.................................................................................................... 80
configuration screen....................................................................................... 307
connections
master valve/station.................................................................................. 22
continue watering............................................................................................. 46
continuous cycle ........................................................................................ 42, 94
Continuous Cycle........................................................................................... 329
contrast keys .................................................................................................... 12
control devices............................................................................................... 230
control panel features....................................................................................... 10
controller........................................................................................................ 328
Controller....................................................................................................... 329
Controller Address......................................................................................... 329
controller configuration ................................................................................... 79
controller enclosure ......................................................................................... 20
controller face panel ........................................................................................ 10
controller initialization.................................................................................... 23
Controller Initialization.................................................................................. 329
controller keys ................................................................................................. 15
Controller Keys.............................................................................................. 329
controller logs ................................................................................................ 158
controller options ....................................................................................... 67, 69
controller specifications..................................................................................... 4
controller submaster....................................................................................... 154
count-down clock..................................................................................... 64, 257
create a program........................................................................................... 28
current checking
enable/disable ........................................................................................... 258
current limit
maximum.................................................................................................... 57
minimum .................................................................................................... 57
options ........................................................................................................ 54
current limit detection ................................................................................. 255
current limit setup .......................................................................................... 259
Current Limits................................................................................................ 329
current measurement................................................................................ 64, 257
Current Monitor .......................................................................................... 254
current monitor overview............................................................................... 254
current monitor setup ..................................................................................... 254
Index
Page 339
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
current value
maximum ................................................................................................. 261
minimum .................................................................................................. 261
cycle mode..................................................................................................41, 42
Cycle Mode ................................................................................................... 329
D
day keypad..................................................................................................... 329
default values............................................................................................35, 330
delay flow limit.............................................................................................. 239
delay limit........................................................................................................ 71
delay time ...................................................................................................49, 71
Delay Time .............................................................................................330, 335
device .............................................................................................190, 325, 328
Device............................................................................................................ 330
diagnostic
see troubleshooting................................................................................... 158
station procedure ...................................................................................... 142
diagnostic procedure...................................................................................... 142
diagnostics
communications ....................................................................................... 158
digital multimeters....................................................................................... 317
direct connection ........................................................................................... 153
disable
access code ................................................................................................. 77
current ........................................................................................................ 53
flow ............................................................................................................ 53
limit checking............................................................................................. 53
lower limit .................................................................................................. 54
moisture limit ............................................................................................. 83
upper limit .................................................................................................. 54
Down Arrow.................................................................................................. 330
Download ...................................................................................................... 330
downloading .................................................................................................. 155
Downloading ................................................................................................. 330
E
enable
access codes ............................................................................................... 78
access level................................................................................................. 78
current ........................................................................................................ 53
current limits .............................................................................................. 54
flow ............................................................................................................ 53
flow limits .................................................................................................. 54
moisture sensor........................................................................................... 83
Page 340
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
omit by date ................................................................................................ 44
upper limit .................................................................................................. 54
enable/disable current checking ..................................................................... 258
enable/disable station flow limit .................................................................... 239
Enter Key....................................................................................................... 330
entering an access code.................................................................................. 269
ET 159
ET readings.................................................................................................... 127
evapotranspiration.......................................................................................... 159
EvapoTranspiration........................................................................................ 330
EV-CAB-COM .............................................................................................. 330
Evolution ........................................................................................................... 4
Evolution DX2.............................................................................................. 4, 9
example current limit violations .................................................................... 262
F
factory defaults ................................................................................................ 35
features and capabilities.................................................................................. 4
fertilizer station................................................................................................ 59
Field Wiring................................................................................................... 330
flow check delay .............................................................................. 68, 239, 279
flow checking
see enable flow ........................................................................................... 53
flow detection ................................................................................................ 244
flow feature.................................................................................................... 275
flow features .................................................................................................. 232
flow limit
automatic .................................................................................................... 64
checking ................................................................................................... 234
options................................................................................................... 53
delay ........................................................................................................... 68
detection ................................................................................................... 244
enabling/disabling............................................................................... 53, 239
main flow............................................................................................ 62, 237
maximum.................................................................................................... 57
minimum .................................................................................................... 57
monthly....................................................................................................... 69
options ........................................................................................................ 53
overflow warning...................................................................................... 246
sensor selection........................................................................................... 69
station lower ....................................................................................... 58, 237
station upper ....................................................................................... 58, 236
under flow warning................................................................................... 246
violation examples .................................................................................. 245
water limit ................................................................................................ 246
Flow Limit Violation ..................................................................................... 244
Index
Page 341
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Max ...............................................................................................275, 330
devices...................................................................................................... 277
hardwire configuration ............................................................................. 280
limitations ............................................................................................... 279
main flow limits ....................................................................................... 279
overview................................................................................................... 276
participants ............................................................................................... 276
shared devices ............................................................................................ 81
Flow Max Communications Failure........................................................... 311
Flow Max Lower Limit Violation ................................................................. 309
Flow Max Main Flow .................................................................................... 312
Flow Max Setup Procedure ........................................................................... 285
Flow Max Upper Limit Violation.................................................................. 310
Flow Max Warnings and Exception Conditions ............................................ 309
Flow Max Worksheet .................................................................................... 301
flow meter
rates .......................................................................................................... 241
Flow Meters.................................................................................................. 232
Flow Rate Delay ............................................................................................ 331
flow sensor
calibration tables ...................................................................................... 248
compare limits............................................................................................ 69
delay limit .................................................................................................. 71
hardware..................................................................................................... 19
installation............................................................................................... 253
K and offset value .................................................................................... 234
options........................................................................................................ 84
overview................................................................................................... 233
setup ........................................................................................................... 84
Flow Sensor................................................................................................... 331
Flow Sensors ................................................................................................. 278
flow warning
see warning .............................................................................................. 163
FM warning
see warning .............................................................................................. 163
freeze sensors ................................................................................................ 230
Function (F1-F6) keys ................................................................................... 331
function keys ................................................................................................... 10
fuse .................................................................................................................. 18
G
gallons per minute ........................................................................................... 58
Getting Started...............................................................................................23
GFI .................................................................................................................. 18
give warning
watering...................................................................................................... 46
Page 342
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
global
settings....................................................................................................... 23
Global Settings .............................................................................................. 331
GPM ...................................................................................................... 126, 232
ground fault interrupter.................................................................................... 18
H
hardwire
connections .............................................................................................. 283
Link .......................................................................................................... 280
hardwire configuration................................................................................... 276
hardwire data ................................................................................................. 311
host computer ................................................................................................ 153
Host Computer............................................................................................... 331
hourly rain limit ............................................................................................. 177
I
Icon ............................................................................................................ 1, 331
individual station control ............................................................................ 120
Initialization................................................................................................... 331
injector
delay time ................................................................................................... 60
fertilizer ...................................................................................................... 60
injector station ................................................................................................. 60
Injector Station .............................................................................................. 331
internal assemblies........................................................................................... 17
invalid entry..................................................................................................... 17
irrigation program.............................................................................. 41, 43, 328
options ........................................................................................................ 43
Irrigation Program ......................................................................................... 331
ISC................................................................................................................. 331
definition .................................................................................................. 120
options ................................................................................................ 50, 122
setup options............................................................................................... 50
K
K and offset values .......................................................................... 85, 234, 235
K and Offset values........................................................................................ 86
K Value.......................................................................................................... 332
key
contrast ....................................................................................................... 16
controller .................................................................................................... 15
down arrow................................................................................................. 15
enter............................................................................................................ 16
Index
Page 343
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
function ...................................................................................................... 15
invalid entry ............................................................................................... 17
language ..................................................................................................... 16
program on/off ........................................................................................... 16
up arrow.............................................................................................. 14, 15
key pad ............................................................................................................ 10
keyboard main panel........................................................................................ 17
keypad
days ............................................................................................................ 15
numeric....................................................................................................... 15
L
language
options ....................................................................................................... 24
lighting .....................................................................................................44, 120
limit
current ........................................................................................................ 57
flow ............................................................................................................ 57
options........................................................................................................ 57
limit checking ...........................................................................................53, 239
options.................................................................................................52, 259
Limit Checking...............................................................................236, 241, 332
Limit Exceeded.......................................................................................184, 246
limits/type........................................................................................................ 52
procedure.................................................................................................... 55
line break
station ....................................................................................................... 245
M
main board....................................................................................................... 17
main flow
main line break......................................................................................... 245
operation................................................................................................... 237
procedure.................................................................................................... 61
unscheduled.............................................................................................. 238
Main Flow ..................................................................................................... 332
main line limits (Flow Max) ........................................................................ 279
main menu ....................................................................................................... 14
Main Menu .................................................................................................... 332
main power switch box..................................................................................18
Main Power Switch Box.................................................................................. 18
manual control
menu......................................................................................................... 133
multi-station ............................................................................................. 137
options...................................................................................................... 133
Page 344
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
station ....................................................................................................... 145
test ..................................................................................................... 33, 134
Manual Control.............................................................................................. 332
Manual Station............................................................................................... 332
Manual System Control ................................................................................. 133
Manual Test Mode......................................................................................... 332
master valve
board........................................................................................................... 18
initialization................................................................................................ 25
limits................................................................................................... 55, 260
normally closed ........................................................................... 22, 47, 244
normally open..................................................................................... 47, 244
on/off ........................................................................................................ 137
program setup ............................................................................................. 47
Master Valve ........................................................................................ 198, 199
Master Valve Delay Turn On......................................................................... 332
Master Valve Output...................................................................................... 332
maximum controller current .......................................................................... 263
measurements
ET readings .............................................................................................. 127
flow readings ............................................................................................ 126
moisture readings...................................................................................... 127
options ...................................................................................................... 125
procedure.................................................................................................. 126
rain/wind readings .................................................................................... 128
Menu.............................................................................................................. 332
modem ........................................................................................................... 153
modify program ........................................................................................ 30, 92
options ........................................................................................................ 92
Moisture Sensor ............................................................................................. 332
Moisture Sensor Trip Point............................................................................ 333
Monitor Setup ................................................................................................ 254
monthly flow limit ................................................................................... 69, 238
Monthly Water Totals.................................................................................... 243
multiple stations
non-overlap............................................................................................... 262
non-overlap protection...................................................................... 247, 262
multi-station
clear all ..................................................................................................... 141
diagnostics................................................................................................ 142
station on concurrently ............................................................................. 138
valve/pump setup...................................................................................... 140
Multi-Station
procedure.......................................................................................... 137, 143
multi-station diagnostics.............................................................................. 142
mv/pump/power board..................................................................................... 18
Index
Page 345
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
N
new program
procedure.................................................................................................. 111
New Program..........................................................................................111, 112
no water window ....................................................................................149, 150
No Water Window......................................................................................... 333
Non-volatile Memory .................................................................................... 333
normally closed master valve
see master valve ......................................................................................... 47
Normally Closed Valve ................................................................................. 333
normally open master valve
see master valve ......................................................................................... 47
Normally Open Valve.................................................................................... 333
Numeric Keypad............................................................................................ 333
O
Off-line ...................................................................................................157, 333
offset and K values .............................................................................84, 85, 235
calibration tables ...............................................................................235, 248
Offset Value .................................................................................................. 333
omit by date
enable ....................................................................................................41, 44
options........................................................................................................ 45
procedure.................................................................................................... 71
Omit By Date................................................................................................. 333
on-line............................................................................................................ 157
On-line........................................................................................................... 333
Over Current.................................................................................................. 333
Overflow.................................................................................................245, 246
overlap protection .......................................................................................41, 43
Overlap Protection ...............................................................................247, 333
P
percent
example .................................................................................................... 108
procedure ................................................................................................ 107
Percent Run Time .......................................................................................... 334
phone communication.................................................................................... 281
physical configuration ..........................................................................280, 306
Polarity Checkout Procedure ..................................................................321, 324
power board..................................................................................................... 18
Power Failure/Recovery.............................................................................. 265
Power Glitch.................................................................................................. 334
problem report ............................................................................................... 158
Page 346
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
problem reporting................................................................................ 157, 265
procedure
access code entry ...................................................................................... 269
access code, using..................................................................................... 272
auto limits................................................................................................... 63
clear program............................................................................................ 116
controller configuration .............................................................................. 80
controller flow options ............................................................................... 68
current checking ....................................................................................... 258
current setup ........................................................................................... 259
diagnostics................................................................................................ 142
Flow Max review..................................................................................... 306
Flow Max satellites................................................................................... 294
Flow Max setup ........................................................................................ 285
Flow Max submaster ................................................................................ 286
flow meter .................................................................................................. 84
FM main flow limit ............................................................................ 61, 292
initialization............................................................................................... 23
ISC.............................................................................................................. 50
limit checking ............................................................................................. 53
limits/type................................................................................................... 55
main flow............................................................................................ 61, 292
measurements ........................................................................................... 126
moisture sensor........................................................................................... 83
multi-station diagnostics........................................................................... 142
multi-station, manual................................................................................ 137
new program............................................................................................. 111
omit by date ................................................................................................ 71
percentage run time .................................................................................. 107
program on/off.......................................................................................... 119
program setup ............................................................................................. 42
program start time....................................................................................... 93
quick manual test....................................................................................... 33
quick modify program ............................................................................... 30
quick new program ..................................................................................... 28
quick program on/off ................................................................................. 32
quick rain shutdown ................................................................................... 34
quick station ............................................................................................. 105
rain off ...................................................................................................... 149
reading flow meter rates ........................................................................... 243
reading flow water totals .......................................................................... 241
real time flow............................................................................................ 304
review all .................................................................................................. 131
review moisture sensor ............................................................................... 83
review program......................................................................................... 113
send .......................................................................................................... 109
single station............................................................................................. 145
Index
Page 347
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
start time..................................................................................................... 93
station number............................................................................................ 51
stations run time ....................................................................................... 102
test, manual .............................................................................................. 134
upload....................................................................................................... 155
user options ................................................................................................ 73
water days, 31 day cycle........................................................................... 100
water days, skip by day............................................................................ 98
water total................................................................................................. 129
watering, 14 days........................................................................................ 96
program ......................................................................................................41, 89
clear.......................................................................................................... 116
example ...................................................................................................... 90
execution .................................................................................................... 91
main menu.................................................................................................. 91
modify ........................................................................................................ 92
new program............................................................................................. 111
options........................................................................................................ 41
review....................................................................................................... 113
setup ........................................................................................................... 41
starting...................................................................................................... 117
stopping.................................................................................................... 117
Program ......................................................................................................... 334
Program Entry ................................................................................................. 89
program on/off..........................................................................................32, 117
program on/off key .......................................................................................... 11
Program On/Off Key ..................................................................................... 334
program transfer ............................................................................................ 155
program upload.............................................................................................. 155
programmable rain shutdown ........................................................................ 151
pump
initialization................................................................................................ 26
manual turn on.......................................................................................... 137
multiple ................................................................................................... 196
setup ........................................................................................................... 48
pump board...................................................................................................... 18
Q
Quick Setup
create new program .................................................................................... 28
manual test .................................................................................................33
modify program.......................................................................................... 30
program on/off ........................................................................................... 32
rain shutdown............................................................................................. 34
quick station option ..................................................................................... 105
Quit key ........................................................................................................... 11
Page 348
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Quit Key ........................................................................................................ 334
R
radio............................................................................................................... 153
radio frequency .............................................................................................. 280
rain gauge .............................................................................................. 128, 159
Rain Gauge .................................................................................................... 334
RAIN MASTER LIMITED WARRANTY ................................................... 355
rain off........................................................................................................... 149
rain sensors .................................................................................................... 230
rain shutdown
enable ......................................................................................................... 43
on/off .......................................................................................................... 34
procedure.................................................................................................. 149
Rain Shutdown .............................................................................................. 334
rain/wind........................................................................................................ 128
RAM .............................................................................................................. 334
reading flow meter rates ................................................................................ 241
reading flow water totals................................................................................ 243
real time flow monitor ................................................................................. 304
reset switch ...................................................................................................... 18
Resistance Scale............................................................................................. 316
review all
procedure.................................................................................................. 131
Review All..................................................................................................... 131
review program
overview ................................................................................................... 113
review Program
procedure.................................................................................................. 114
Run Time ....................................................................................................... 334
S
Satellite .................................................................................................. 153, 334
Satellite Address ............................................................................................ 335
satellite address display ................................................................................. 154
Satellite Controllers ....................................................................................... 294
screen display .................................................................................................. 10
Screen Display ............................................................................................... 335
security gates ................................................................................................... 44
send ............................................................................................................... 109
Sensor ............................................................................................................ 335
sensor terminal board....................................................................................... 17
sensors
see flow ...................................................................................................... 19
see moisture sensors ................................................................................... 19
Index
Page 349
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
setup .................................................................................................42, 269, 330
Setup ..................................................................................................35, 39, 335
Setup Configuration
communications type.................................................................................. 81
operational modes ...................................................................................... 79
submaster ................................................................................................... 82
Setup Controller
access code enable...................................................................................... 77
access code level ........................................................................................ 78
access codes ............................................................................................... 77
Date ............................................................................................................ 75
flow delay time........................................................................................... 71
flow meter comparisons ............................................................................. 69
flow options................................................................................................ 68
irrigation..................................................................................................... 43
language ..................................................................................................... 76
monthly water limit .................................................................................... 69
omit by date................................................................................................ 71
program on/off ......................................................................................... 118
shared devices ............................................................................................ 82
time ............................................................................................................ 74
unscheduled flow........................................................................................ 71
Setup ISC
see setup program....................................................................................... 50
setup overview................................................................................................. 35
Setup Program
cycle mode ................................................................................................. 42
master valve ............................................................................................... 47
MV delay turn on time ............................................................................... 49
MV on between stations ............................................................................. 48
omit by date................................................................................................ 44
overlap protection....................................................................................... 43
pump .......................................................................................................... 48
station delay time ....................................................................................... 45
time format ................................................................................................. 46
water limit .................................................................................................. 46
Setup Quick
create new program .................................................................................28
K and offset values..................................................................................... 84
manual test .................................................................................................33
modify program..........................................................................................30
program on/off ...........................................................................................32
rain shutdown............................................................................................. 34
Setup Sensors
flow 1 K and offset..................................................................................... 84
flow 2 K and offset..................................................................................... 84
flow sensor ................................................................................................. 84
Page 350
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
main flow limit ........................................................................................... 61
moisture sensor........................................................................................... 83
station type ................................................................................................. 59
Setup Stations
auto limits................................................................................................... 63
enable/disable limit Check.......................................................................... 53
low limit current ......................................................................................... 57
maximum flow limit ................................................................................... 58
minimum flow limit.................................................................................... 58
upper limit current ...................................................................................... 57
shared devices................................................................................................ 275
short circuit .................................................................................................... 142
Short Circuit .................................................................................................. 335
shutdown
rain............................................................................................................ 149
wind.......................................................................................................... 184
single station procedure ................................................................................. 145
Skip By Day................................................................................................... 335
solenoid.......................................................................................................... 227
Solenoid................................................................................................. 335, 336
specifications
electrical ....................................................................................................... 9
features ......................................................................................................... 4
Standard Flow Warnings ............................................................................... 166
start time .................................................................................................... 42, 93
Start Time ...................................................................................................... 335
Starting a Program ......................................................................................... 119
station
current limit setup..................................................................................... 260
delay time ............................................................................................. 41, 45
enable/disable ............................................................................................. 53
lower limit .......................................................................................... 58, 237
number............................................................................................ 50, 51, 55
options ........................................................................................................ 52
output board................................................................................................ 18
overflow warning...................................................................................... 246
overview ................................................................................................... 102
rain off ...................................................................................................... 149
run time .................................................................................................... 103
under flow warning................................................................................... 246
upper limit .......................................................................................... 58, 237
Station and Station Number ........................................................................... 335
Station Delay Time ........................................................................................ 45
station lower limit .......................................................................................... 237
Station Number Procedure............................................................................... 51
Stations .....................................................................................28, 102, 227, 247
status options
Index
Page 351
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
comm. status............................................................................................. 123
measurements........................................................................................... 123
review all.................................................................................................. 123
water total................................................................................................. 123
stop watering ................................................................................................... 46
submaster..................................................................................81, 153, 194, 292
Submaster ...................................................................................................... 335
Submaster Setup Procedure ........................................................................... 286
system configuration........................................................................................ 17
system defaults ................................................................................................ 35
system status.................................................................................................. 123
T
telephone ....................................................................................................... 153
test switch ........................................................................................................ 18
time format ...................................................................................................... 41
Time Format .................................................................................................. 336
time/date setup................................................................................................. 74
time-out ........................................................................................................... 12
tipping bucket ................................................................................................ 128
total monthly flow limit................................................................................. 238
Touch Key ..................................................................................................... 336
touch tone ........................................................................................................ 11
transferring programs................................................................................. 155
Transient Protection....................................................................................... 336
Trip Point....................................................................................................... 336
troubleshooting
multiple lights on...................................................................................... 227
multiple stations do not water................................................................... 227
troubleshooting (flow charts)
controller emits tone............................................................................... 222
display is blank ....................................................................................... 220
flow sensor reads zero ............................................................................ 214
monthly flow violation............................................................................ 226
program does not start........................................................................... 212
program does not water ......................................................................... 223
station does not water............................................................................. 217
stations shut off ........................................................................................ 224
troubleshooting (warnings)............................................................................ 163
troubleshooting basics
analog meter ............................................................................................. 315
cable checkout.......................................................................................... 318
continuity ................................................................................................. 314
continuity checker .................................................................................... 314
digital meter ............................................................................................. 317
multimeter ................................................................................................ 314
Page 352
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
ohmmeter.................................................................................................. 314
trunk............................................................................................................... 154
U
under flow..................................................................................................... 246
unscheduled flow ............................................................................................. 71
unscheduled Flow .......................................................................................... 238
Unscheduled Flow ......................................................................................... 336
Up Arrow....................................................................................................... 336
Upload ........................................................................................................... 336
upload procedure ........................................................................................... 155
User Interface ................................................................................................ 336
user’s manual..................................................................................................... 1
using access codes ......................................................................................... 272
Using Access Codes ...................................................................................... 272
V
valid program........................................................................................... 12, 102
valve
configuration .............................................................................................. 25
options ........................................................................................................ 25
viewing the list............................................................................................... 163
violations
flow limit .................................................................................................. 245
Voltage Scale................................................................................................. 316
W
warning
AC power ................................................................................................. 186
comm. failure............................................................................................ 181
current lower limit .................................................................................... 174
current upper limit .................................................................................... 172
daily rain limit .......................................................................................... 189
flow lower limit ........................................................................................ 166
flow max................................................................................................... 191
flow upper limit ........................................................................................ 168
FM comm restored ................................................................................... 208
FM comm. failure..................................................................................... 206
FM flow lower limit ................................................................................. 191
FM flow upper limit ................................................................................. 193
FM limits aborted ..................................................................................... 205
FM main flow........................................................................................... 209
FM multiple flow meter 1 assign.............................................................. 194
FM multiple flow meter 2 assign.............................................................. 195
Index
Page 353
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
FM multiple MV1 assign ......................................................................... 198
FM multiple MV2 assignment.................................................................. 199
FM Multiple N.O. assignment.................................................................. 201
FM multiple pump.................................................................................... 196
FM station advance .................................................................................. 203
FM stop water .......................................................................................... 204
hardwire communications restored........................................................... 178
hourly rain limit........................................................................................ 177
main line break......................................................................................... 176
monthly water limit .................................................................................. 170
off line ...................................................................................................... 179
power........................................................................................................ 185
short circuit .............................................................................................. 190
unscheduled limit ..................................................................................... 188
upload request .......................................................................................... 187
wind lower limit ....................................................................................... 183
wind upper limit ....................................................................................... 184
warning list .................................................................................................... 163
warning report ........................................................................................157, 162
Warning/report .............................................................................................. 337
Warranty........................................................................................................ 355
Water Days .................................................................................................... 337
Water Days Procedure (14 Day Cycle)............................................................ 95
Water Days Procedure (31 Day Cycle).......................................................... 100
water days procedure (skip by day) ................................................................. 98
water total .................................................................................................... 129
Water Window............................................................................................... 337
Watering Day Options ..................................................................................... 95
Weather Center Sensors................................................................................. 159
Page 354
Index
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Glossary
Access Code
A user assigned 3 digit code used to restrict unauthorized usage
(reprogramming/control) of the controller.
Alarm
An irrigation related "event" reported by the controller which
requires operator notification and/or action.
Anemometer
Wind speed measuring device (Measuring units in MPH). at
water limit The specified monthly water total limit based on a
given irrigation program. When the limit is exceeded, the
watering program will either stop watering or display a warning.
Auto Limits
Feature that automatically establishes upper and lower limits for
flow and current.
Base Screen
Base screen is the starting point or reference screen/position
from which all user interaction occurs. Additionally, when the
controller displays the base screen information, the controller
functions in the "automatic mode" meaning that any valid
program(s) will automatically start at its programmed start
time(s).
(The manual functions [see chapter 8] disable the automatic
mode.) The controller has a built in time-out function (2 hour
time-out) which returns the controller to the base screen
(automatic mode) if the user inadvertently leaves the controller
in some other screen.
Central Control Mode
Central Control Mode indicates that two way communications
have been established between the evolution controller and the
Central Control PC. This means that programming data can be
downloaded and uploaded, and that the Central Control PC can
control all functions remotely. Central Control Mode can be
entered in two ways:
Page 328
Glossary
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
1. If a controller has been setup as a submaster and a valid
address has been entered.
2. If the controller is physically connected as a satellite and has
established two-way communications with its submaster.
Central User
One who operates a controller irrigation system using a Central
Control computer.
Condemned Station
A station that shut down due to operational defects or exceeded
limits. The condemned station will not operate again until the
defects are corrected and warnings are cleared.
Continuous Cycle
A watering program that will run continuously within a user
defined water window. After the first cycle, a specified soak
time is initiated and the program starts again.
Controller
A microprocessor based solid state programmable apparatus that
automatically controls and manages irrigation valves, pumps,
flow sensors and other peripheral devices.
Controller Address
Identifies each controller/satellite within a multiple controller
system. The address number is alternately displayed on the base
screen with the program number.
Controller Initialization
A one time initialization process that sets up the controller to
operate under global default settings.
Controller Keys
The controller panel touch keys used to move through all menus
for programming and data entry.
Current Limits
The maximum amount of current that a station is allowed to
draw. If the specified maximum current is exceeded, the station
will shut down and the program advances to the next station.
Also refers to the minimum amount of current that a station
should be drawing. If a station output does not draw any
current, it is likely that the circuit is open.
Cycle Mode
Option that selects either start times or continuous cycle.
Day Keypad
Front panel keys representing days of the week used to enter
water day programming information.
Glossary
Page 329
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Default Values
The parameter values established prior to any programming.
Delay Time
The specified time period prior to taking flow measurements
(range from 1 to 6 minutes) to allow for water line stabilization.
Device
Defined in an irrigation system configuration as a Master Valve,
Pump or Flow Sensor.
Download
When operating a controller in Central Control Mode, the term
download indicates when one or more programs are sent from
the Central Control Computer to the controller (satellite). The
controller program is overwritten.
Downloading
The process of transferring files or programs from a Central
Control Computer to a satellite controller or a group of
controllers.
Down Arrow
A menu positioning key used to move to the next
screen/function.
Enter Key
Front panel key used to indicate that previously entered numeric
keypad data is complete /correct. When ENTER is hit, the
controller accepts and processes the numeric data.
EvapoTranspiration (ET)
The name reflects two ways water moves from an irrigated field
to the atmosphere: Evaporation, which is the movement of
water from the wet soil to the air, and Transpiration which is the
movement of water from the plant to the air.
EV-CAB-COM
A particular type of communication cable used in controller
hardwire configurations.
Field Wiring
The wiring setup among controllers, Master Valves, Pumps,
sensors, and valve solenoids.
FlowMax
Multiple controller system configuration comprised of one
submaster and one or more satellites. This unique feature allows
controllers to utilize a single point of connection to share devices
(i.e. Flow Sensors, Master Valves, Pumps, etc.) and intelligently
manage system operation.
Page 330
Glossary
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Flow Rate Delay
Refers to a delay time between 1 and 6 minutes to allow water
line pressures to stabilize prior to performing a flow limit check.
Flow Sensor
A rotating paddle device placed in a main water line used to
measure water flow. The device must be calibrated using K and
Offset values to compensate for pipe size.
Function (F1-F6) keys
Front panel keys F1-F6 are used for transition through different
controller functions. Their function is context sensitive which
means that their definition changes depending on the current
menu level.
Global Settings
Settings which are programmed into all controllers of an
irrigation system.
Host Computer
The Central Control Computer that controls the irrigation
system.
Icon
A graphic symbol or representation of a function, such as the
pointing finger icon indicating the flow of menu display screens.
Initialization
Upon the very first time controller power-up, various data must
be initialized (e.g. date/time, usage of master valve, etc.) before
the user can enter the base screen. Once this data has been
correctly entered, subsequent power-ups will bypass the
initialization prompts and start with the base screen display. (In
the event that the user wishes to change the initialization data,
the user can do so from the setup screens.)
Injector Station
A dedicated station output most commonly used for applying
fertilizer.
Irrigation Program
See Program.
ISC
Individual Station Control (ISC) is an alternative programming
mode that treats an individual station like a program. The user
enters water days, start times, and runtimes for each station
programmed as an ISC.
Glossary
Page 331
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
K Value
A numeric value required for the proper setup/ calibration of
flow sensors.
Limit Checking
The controller validates user defined upper and lower limits for
flow, and current readings. Violations are reported in the
warning/report buffer.
Main Flow
The maximum flow limit for a complete irrigation system.
Main Menu
The starting menu that provides the major options for all
subsequent programming and setups.
Manual Control
Manual control provides maintenance personnel the ability to
turn on/off individual stations and programs. The controller can
also be placed in rain shutdown for either a programmable or
indefinite amount of time.
Manual Station
Feature allowing any one station to be turned on manually.
Manual Test Mode
Test feature that turns on all stations one at a time for a specified
time period for purposes of testing and analysis.
Master Valve Output
A dedicated controller output which is activated by the controller
each time a program start time occurs (typical operation). The
evolution controller however, allows a number of different setup
options associated with master valve operations. This output is
typically connected to a Pump or another valve which acts as the
master enable for all irrigation.
Master Valve Delay Turn On
The amount of delay time in seconds from the time a Program
starts until the master valve turns on.
Menu
Any LCD display which has F1-F6 menu select option keys to
move to other LCD displays.
Moisture Sensor
A water sensing device placed in the root zone of a watering area
which monitors the amount of water application. If watering
exceeds specified limits, the station will turn off.
Page 332
Glossary
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Moisture Sensor Trip Point
The specified watering level that determines watering activity.
When the sensor detects moisture above the trip point, watering
will stop.
Non-volatile Memory
Refers to computer memory that will not be erased regardless of
power failures or related problems.
Normally Closed Valve
Master Valves are normally closed and must be energized to
deliver water flow.
Normally Open Valve
Master valve that is normally open and must be energized to turn
off.
No Water Window
A user specified period of time (stop water flow) where
irrigation is not allowed. The watering window is specified on a
daily basis by establishing a daily start and end time. The
controller automatically disregards any program start times
which occur in the watering window.
Numeric Keypad
Front panel keys used to enter all numeric data.
Off-line
Relates to any controller that loses hardwire communication
within a system.
Offset Value
A numeric value required for the proper setup/calibration of flow
sensors.
Omit By Date
An Evolution DX2 feature which allows the user to specify dates
which irrigation will be disallowed (any programmed start times
which occur on these dates will be skipped).
On-line
Relates to any controller that is properly communicating within
the irrigation system.
Over Current
Condition at any station that detects an excessive amount of
electrical current.
Overlap Protection
Feature which insures that no two programs will run during the
same time. (Each program must be set up to have its overlap
protection on.)
Glossary
Page 333
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Percent Run Time
Provides the ability to modify the run times of all stations in a
given program. A station run time programmed at 10 minutes
would run for 5 minutes if the percentage run time is set to 50%.
Power Glitch
A disturbance in the AC power line.
Program
A program provides a way of grouping stations with similar
irrigation characteristics so that the start/stop of water can be
controlled automatically. In order to establish a valid program
the user must specify:
1. The station numbers associated with the program (stations).
2. The time(s) during the day when the program is executed
(start times).
3. The days of the week when the program is to be executed
(water days).
4. The amount of time each station operates (station run time).
Program On/Off Key
A dedicated front panel key which allows the user to
immediately turn a program either on or off.
Quit Key
A front panel key which brings the user back to the base screen
display.
Rain Gauge
Device used to measure rainfall. Units are measured in pulses
with each pulse representing 1/100 inch.
Rain Shutdown
A feature which stops all irrigation in the event of rain. Several
options are associated with rain shutdown including:
1. Rain shutdown on/off (indefinite period)
2. Programmable rain shutdown (user specifies the amount of
time which the controller is in rain shutdown)
3. Rain shutdown enable/disable on a per program basis
RAM
Random Access Memory
Run Time
The amount of "on" time either in minutes/ seconds or hours/
minutes (setup option) for a station.
Satellite
A term used for any controller which is connected to a Central
Control System or a submaster.
Page 334
Glossary
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Satellite Address
Identifies each satellite within a multiple controller system. The
address number is alternately displayed on the base screen with
the program number.
Screen Display
The information which appears in the LCD display of the front
panel.
Sensor
A device used to detect and measure flow, moisture, wind or ET
(evapotranspiration).
Setup
The setup function provides the mechanism for tailoring the
evolution controller operation to a specific irrigation application.
Numerous setup options allow flexibility for master valve usage,
program execution, station limit checking, controller operations
and programming.
Short Circuit
Electrical term indicating an excessive amount of current being
drawn on a given station or Master Valve/Pump output.
Skip By Day
A water day cycle option which allows the user to program
water days by defining the number of days which should be
skipped before the next watering occurs.
Solenoid
An electrical coil used to turn valves on or off which is
energized by the station or Master Valve/Pump outputs.
Start Time
The time of day which a program (or ISC) starts its execution.
Station Delay Time
The inter station delay time (in seconds) which the controller
waits before starting the next successive station of a program.
Station and Station Number
The LCD displayed station number has a one for one
correspondence with the evolution output board station number
at the terminal block (field wire connection). Each station may
actually connect to one or more valve solenoids depending on
the installation as long as the maximum current for a station and
is not exceeded. Stations can be assigned to programs, or can be
programmed individually as ISCs.
Submaster
A submaster is a term used for an Evolution DX2 controller
Glossary
Page 335
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
which is being operated in conjunction with an RMIS Central
Control System. A submaster is a controller which has
specialized communications capability. It can be set up for
direct two-way communications with the Central Control PC
either via radio, telephone, or wire. Additionally, the submaster
has additional responsibility for communications to any satellites
which may be physically connected to it.
Time Format
Option that allows time to be indicated in hours and minutes or
minutes and seconds. An additional option selects 24 hour or 12
hour AM/PM format.
Touch Key
The keys on the DX2 front panel producing the distinctive beep
which verifies key press.
Transient Protection
Built-in feature to prevent damage to electronic components
against AC power disturbances and lightning.
Trip Point
Moisture sensors must have a definition of "wet" versus "dry"
soil. This transition point is known as the moisture sensor trip
point. Each moisture sensor must have its trip point setup on an
individual basis. The trip point is established using a relative
number between 0 and 200. Higher numbers indicate more
moisture.
Up Arrow
A menu positioning key used to move to the previous screen/
function.
Unscheduled Flow
Defined as any water flow that is not programmed or under the
control of the controller.
User Interface
Refers to the inter-action that takes place between the user and
the controller. The menu option selection features provide an
easy-to-use method of programming thereby making the system
"user friendly".
Upload
When operating a controller in Central Control Mode, the term
upload indicates when one or more programs are sent from the
controller (satellite) to the Central Control PC.
Valve Solenoid
See solenoid.
Page 336
Glossary
Rain Master Irrigation Systems
DX2 User Manual
Warning/report
A controller detected warning or report condition. The user is
notified of these conditions by the appearance of
|F2|=WARNING while in the base screen. Depressing |F2| will
then allow the user to view a list of warning/report conditions.
Water Days
User defined (programmed) days which irrigation shall occur on.
Water Window
A user specified period of time where irrigation is allowed. The
watering window is specified on a daily basis by establishing a
daily start and end time.
Glossary
Page 337
3910-B Royal Avenue
Simi Valley, California 93063
Telephone: (805) 527-4498 Fax: (805) 527-2813
www.Rainmaster.com
RMIS PART No. 500052 Rev. E
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising